2GIG GC2 - Installation and Programming Guide



Related Products

Firmware Update Cable for Go!Control
List Price: $35.00
Our Price: $29.99
Alarm.com Verizon LTE Communicator for 2GIG GC2
Wireless System w/ AC2 Power Cable
List Price: $220.00
Our Price: $169.99
Go!Control Phone (POTS) Module
Alarm.com Verizon Go!Control Cell Comm
Alarm.com Rogers 3G Cell Comm for Go!Control (Canada)
List Price:
Our Price: $89.99
Telguard AT&T Cell Communicator for Go!Control
Alarm.com AT&T 3G Communicator for Go!Control
List Price: $130.00
Our Price: $86.99
Go!Control Wireless Security System
List Price: $200.00
Our Price: $165.99
Go!Control Panel Desktop Mount
List Price: $16.00
Our Price: $9.99
Go!Control Extended Battery Pack
List Price: $34.00
Our Price: $22.99
Go!Control Standard Battery Pack
Go!Control Replacement AC Transformer with 10 foot power cable
List Price: $24.00
Our Price: $12.99
Go!Control Replacement AC Transformer
List Price: $21.00
Our Price: $13.99
Alarm.com Go!Control Movistar Cell Communicator

Related Categories


Document Transcript

GC2 Panel
Installation and Programming Guide
V1.16 Firmware
WARNING:
OWNER’S INSTRUCTION
NOTICE. Not to be removed by anyone
except occupant.
WIRELESS SECURITY SYSTEM CONTENTS
Copyright © 2016
Nortek Security & Control
1
Introduction.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.5
About
 
this
 
Guide.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
5
About
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
System
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
5
Important
 
Information .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
5
Installing
 
the
 
System
 
in
 
Residential
 
Settings.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
5
Installing
 
the
 
System
 
in
 
Commercial
 
Settings.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
6
System
 
Features
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
6
Optional
 
Accessories.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
7
System
 
Configuration
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.8
Control
 
Panel
 
Features
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.9
External
 
Features
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
9
Internal
 
Features.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
10
Installation
 
Outline .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.11
Wireless
 
Installation
 
Tips
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.12
Sensors
 
and
 
Accessories .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.13
Wireless
 
System
 
Sensors
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
13
System
 
Accessories.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
13
Installation.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.14
Control
 
Panel
 
Mounting
 
Plate
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
14
Wireless
 
Sensors.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
14
Hardwired
 
Loops.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
14
Wiring
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
15
Remote
 
Alarm
 
Sounder
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
15
Solid
 
State
 
Output.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
16
Optional
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
16
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
17
Control
 
Panel
 
Wiring
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
19
Control
 
Panel
 
Wiring.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
20
Terminal
 
Block
 
Wiring
 
Diagram .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
20
Backup
 
Battery
 
Connection
 
and
 
Power
 
Supply
 
Wiring
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
20
Wire
 
Size
 
and
 
Length
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
20
Control
 
Panel
 
and
 
Power
 
Supply
 
Mounting
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
21
Commercial
 
Installations
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.22
NFPA
 
Standard
 
72
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.23
Main
 
Display
 
Screens
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.24
Home
 
Screen.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
24
Security
 
Screen
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
24
Arming
 
Screen.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
24
Menu
 
Screen .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
24
System
 
Status
 
Screen
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
25
Toolbox
 
and
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.26
Toolbox
 
Screens
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
26
Accessing
 
the
 
Toolbox.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
26
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
Screens
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
26
Accessing
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
26
System
 
Configuration
 
Screens .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
27
System
 
Status
 
Icons.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.28
AC
 
Power
 
On/OFF .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Phone
 
Line
 
Failure
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Sounder
 
Disabled
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Low
 
Backup
 
Battery
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Test
 
Mode
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypad
 
Traffic.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Cell
 
Radio.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Interior
 
sensor
 
open.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
28
Programming
 
Navigation
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.29
Navigation
 
Arrows
 
&
 
Go
 
To
 
Button
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
29
Questions
 
without
 
Sub

Options
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
29
Questions
 
with
 
Sub

Options
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
29
Questions
 
with
 
Data
 
Entry .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
29
Additional
 
Buttons
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
30
Programming
 
Outline
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.31
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
Compliance.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
31
Programming
 
Question
 
Table.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.32
Zone
 
Numbering
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.35
Sensor
 
Types
 
(Zones)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.36
Voice
 
Descriptors
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.38
Equipment
 
Codes
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.40
Installer
 
Programming
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.41
Account
 
Registration
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
41
Wireless
 
(RF)
 
Sensor
 
Programming.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
41
Q1:
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
Outline.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
42
Summary
 
of
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Screen
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
42
RF
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
Questions .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
42 GC2 Wireless Security System |
Installation and Programming Guide
2
Copyright © 2016 No
rtek Security & Control
Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.44
Q2:
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
Outline
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.45
Summary
 
of
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Screen .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.45
Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
Questions.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.45
Wireless
 
(RF)
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.47
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming
 
Outline.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.48
Summary
 
of
 
RF
 
Key
 
Fob
 
#
 
Screen
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.48
RF
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming
 
Questions.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.48
Wireless
 
(RF)
 
Keypad
 
Programming
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.49
RF
 
Keypad
 
Programming
 
Outline
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.50
Summary
 
of
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
Screen
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.50
RF
 
Keypad
 
Programming
 
Questions
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.50
Control
 
Panel
 
Programming .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Programming
 
Questions
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q1:
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q2:
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q3:
 
RF
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q4:
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
Programming.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q5:
 
Exit
 
Delay,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(45

120).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q6:
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(30

240)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q7:
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
2,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(30

240)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q8:
 
Dialer
 
(0

1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q9:
 
Dialing
 
Prefix
 
(0

4
 
Digits).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q10:
 
Call
 
Waiting
 
Disable
 
Code
 
(0

6
 
Digits)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.52
Q11:
 
CS
 
#1
 
Phone
 
Number
 
(0

25
 
Digits).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.53
Q12:
 
CS
 
#1
 
Account
 
Number
 
(4
 
Digits).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.53
Q13:
 
2

Way
 
Voice
 
(0

2)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.53
Q14:
 
Silent
 
Panic/Burglary
 
Listen
 
Only .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.53
Q15:
 
Dialing
 
Type
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.53
Q16:
 
Police
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0

2)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.53
Q17:
 
Fire
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.53
Q18:
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0

1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q19:
 
Quick
 
Arming
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q20:
 
Swinger
 
Shutdown
 
Count
 
(1

6)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q21:
 
Siren
 
Supervision
 
Time
 
(0

3).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q22:
 
CS
 
Lack
 
of
 
Usage
 
Notification
 
Time
 
(0

255).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q23:
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Time
 
(0

255)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q24:
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q25:
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Reports
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q26:
 
Auto
 
Stay
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.54
Q27:
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
Restart
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.55
Q28:
 
Quick
 
Exit
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.55
Q29:
 
Periodic
 
Test,
 
in
 
Days
 
(0

255)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.55
Q31:
 
Cancel
 
Time,
 
in
 
Minutes
 
(5

255).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.55
Q32:
 
Cancel
 
Display
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.55
Q33:
 
Cross
 
Sensor
 
47

48
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.55
Q34:
 
Cross
 
Sensor
 
Timeout,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(10

120)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.55
Q35:
 
Abort
 
Window
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0

2).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q36:
 
Burglary
 
Bell
 
Cutoff
 
(0
 
to
 
4)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q37:
 
Fire
 
Bell
 
Cutoff
 
(0

4)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q38:
 
Time
 
to
 
Detect
 
AC
 
Loss,
 
in
 
Minutes
 
(0

30)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q39:
 
Random
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Report
 
Time
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q40:
 
CS
 
#2
 
Phone
 
Number
 
(0

25
 
digits).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q41:
 
CS
 
#2
 
Account
 
Number
 
(4
 
Digits).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q42:
 
Remote
 
Control
 
Phone
 
(0

3).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.56
Q43:
 
Installer
 
Code
 
(4
 
Digits).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.57
Q44:
 
Lock
 
Installer
 
Programming
 
(0

2).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.57
Q45:
 
Lock
 
Default
 
Programming
 
(0

2)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.57
Q46:
 
Trouble
 
Doesn’t
 
Sound
 
at
 
Night
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q47:
 
Trouble
 
Resound
 
After
 
Hold
 
Off
 
(0

7)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q48:
 
Download
 
CSID
 
(6
 
Digits)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q49:
 
Programming
 
Mode
 
Entry
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q50:
 
Trouble
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q51:
 
Manual
 
Bypass
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q52:
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q53:
 
System
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.58
Q54:
 
RF
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q55:
 
Opening
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q56:
 
Closing
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q57:
 
Alarm
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q58:
 
Trouble
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q59:
 
Bypass
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q60:
 
AC
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q61:
 
System
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q62:
 
RF
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q63:
 
Phone
 
Fail
 
Detect
 
(0

1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.59
Q64:
 
Smart
 
Test
 
Reports
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.60
Q65:
 
RF
 
Jam
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.60
Q66:
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.60
Q67:
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
Start
 
Month
 
(01

12)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.60 Copyright © 2016 Nortek
Security & Control
3
Q68:
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
Start
 
Monday
 
(1

7)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
60
Q69:
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
End
 
Month
 
(01

12)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
60
Q70:
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
End
 
Sunday
 
(1

7)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
60
Q71:
 
System
 
Tamper
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0

1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
60
Q72:
 
Quick
 
Bypass
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
60
Q73:
 
Disarming
 
Keyfob
 
After
 
Alarm
 
(Alert)
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
60
Q74:
 
Keyfob
 
Arm/Disarm
 
Confirmation
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
61
Q75:
 
Auto
 
Un
 
Bypass
 
for
 
Manual
 
Bypass
 
(0

1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
61
Q76:
 
Force
 
Bypass
 
Reports
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
61
Q77:
 
Event
 
Log
 
(0

3) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
61
Q78:
 
Output.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
61
Q79:
 
Z

Wave
 
Feature
 
(0

3) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
61
Q80:
 
Z

Wave
 
Switches
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
61
Q81:
 
Z

Wave
 
Thermostats
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q82:
 
Z

Wave
 
Door
 
Locks
 
Feature
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q83:
 
Select
 
Temperature
 
Display
 
Units
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q84:
 
Services
 
Require
 
Master
 
Code
 
(0
 
to
 
1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q85:
 
Master
 
User
 
Access
 
to
 
Z

Wave
 
Toolbox
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q86:
 
Disable
 
Siren
 
After
 
Two

Way
 
Audio
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q87:
 
Keyfob/Remote
 
Arming
 
Mode
 
on
 
System
 
Not
 
Ready
 
(0

2)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q88:
 
Siren
 
Mode
 
(0

1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
62
Q89:
 
Allow
 
Backlight
 
Always
 
On
 
(Demo
 
Mode)
 
(0

1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
63
Q90:
 
Energy
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
63
Q91:
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
63
Q92:
 
Select
 
Network
 
Device
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
63
Q93:
 
Enter
 
Broadband
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Time
 
(1

255)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
64
Q94:
 
Select
 
Broadband
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0
 
to
 
1) .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
64
Q95:
 
Select
 
Broadband
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Reports
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
64
Q96:
 
Select
 
Send
 
Report
 
3
 
Times
 
on
 
Panel
 
Tamper
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
64
Q97:
 
Select
 
Sound
 
on
 
Normal
 
Closing
 
Acknowledgement
 
(0
 
to
 
1).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
64
Final
 
Installation
 
Setup .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.65
Exiting
 
Programming
 
(System
 
Configuration).
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
65
Customizing
 
the
 
Installation.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
65
Installer
 
Testing.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.67
Access
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
67
Disable/Enable
 
Sounder.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
67
Disable
 
the
 
Sounder
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
67
Enable
 
the
 
Sounder.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
67
Sensor
 
Type
 
(Zone)
 
Report
 
Test .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
67
Walk
 
Test
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
67
Radio
 
Status
 
Test .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
68
Cell
 
Phone
 
Test
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
68
Telephone
 
Test
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
69
Restore
 
Default
 
System
 
Configuration
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
69
Soft
 
Reset.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
69
Hard
 
Reset .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
69
Regulatory
 
Information
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.70
Wireless
 
Product
 
Notice.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
70
FCC
 
Notice .
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
70
FCC
 
Telephone
 
Rules
 
and
 
Regulations.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
70
Commercial
 
Regulatory
 
Listings.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
71
Limited
 
Warranty
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.
 
.72 GC2 Wireless Security System |
Installation and Programming Guide
4
Copyright © 2016 No
rtek Security & Control Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
5
Introduction
About this Guide
This
 
guide
 
provides
 
distributors,
 
dealers,
 
and
 
authorized
 
installation
 
personnel
 
with
 
information
 
about
 
installing,
 
testing,
 
and
 
maintaining
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
system.
 
2GIGproducts
 
are
 
not
 
sold
 
directly
 
to
 
consumers
 
and
 
can
 
only
 
be
 
obtained
 
from
 
authorized
 
distribution
 
channels.
 
For
 
a
 
list
 
of
 
authorized
 
distributors,
 
visit:
 
http://www.nortekcontrol.com
About the 2GIG Go!Control System
Depending
 
on
 
the
 
options
 
set
 
during
 
the
 
installation,
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
system
 
has
 
the
 
ability
 
to
 
provide
 
three
 
forms
 
of
 
protection:
 
burglary,
 
fire,
 
and
 
emergency,
 
The
 
system
 
consists
 
of
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
wireless
 
sensors
 
for
 
perimeter
 
and
 
interior
 
burglary
 
protection,
 
and
 
wireless
 
smoke
 
and
 
carbon
 
monoxide
 
detectors.
 
In
 
addition,
 
optional
 
remote
 
control
 
key
 
fobs,
 
wireless
 
panic
 
buttons,
 
and
 
keypads
 
may
 
also
 
be
 
installed.
The
 
system
 
monitors
 
all
 
protection
 
sensor
 
types
 
(a.k.a.,
 
“zones”)
 
and
 
the
 
system’s
 
status.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
displays
 
monitoring
 
information
 
and
 
controls
 
the
 
alarm
 
siren.
 
The
 
system
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
setup
 
to
 
send
 
alarm
 
and
 
status
 
reports
 
to
 
a
 
Central
 
Station
 
and
 
has
 
the
 
capability
 
for
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
voice
 
communications
 
with
 
the
 
Remote
 
Service
 
Provider
 
(RSP).
 
When
 
a
 
security
 
system
 
is
 
installed,
 
insurers
 
may
 
offer
 
discounts
 
on
 
the
 
homeowners’
 
or
 
renters’
 
insurance
 
policy.
 
Although
 
the
 
requirements
 
and
 
discount
 
credits
 
vary
 
for
 
each
 
different
 
insurer,
 
users
 
can
 
generally
 
save
 
money
 
as
 
the
 
level
 
of
 
protection
 
increases.
 
It
 
is
 
recommended
 
that
 
you
 
inform
 
the
 
end
 
user
 
to
 
check
 
with
 
their
 
insurance
 
agent
 
to
 
determine
 
if
 
the
 
insurer
 
has
 
specific
 
requirements
 
and/or
 
offers
 
any
 
discount(s).
Important Information
The
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
security
 
system
 
conforms
 
to
 
the
 
Security
 
Industry
 
Alarm
 
Coalition’s
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01:
 
Control
 
Panel
 
Standard

Features
 
for
 
False
 
Alarm
 
Reduction.
 
It
 
also
 
meets
 
the
 
residential
 
security
 
system
 
certification
 
criteria
 
for
 
the
 
ETL
 
Listed
 
Mark.
 
The
 
recommended
 
storage
 
temperature
 
for
 
all
 
Control
 
Panels
 
is
 ‐
10°C
 
to
 
60°C
 
(14°F
 
to
 
140°F).
 
For
 
optimal
 
Control
 
Panel
 
use,
 
operation
 
temperature
 
is
 
0°C
 
to
 
49°C
 
(32°F
 
to
 
120°F).
 
No
 
altitude
 
range
 
limitations
 
have
 
been
 
reported
 
while
 
transporting
 
Control
 
Panel.
Installing the System
in Residential Settings
When
 
installing
 
the
 
system
 
in
 
a
 
residential
 
setting,
 
be
 
aware
 
of
 
the
 
following:

Fire
 
warning
 
systems
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
national
 
codes
.
 
In
 
the
 
United
 
States,
 
fire
 
warning
 
systems
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
ANSI/NFPA
 
72
 
National
 
Fire
 
Alarm
 
and
 
Signaling
 
Code
 
and
 
ANSI/NFPA
 
70
 
National
 
Electric
 
Code
.

A
 
permit
 
may
 
be
 
required
 
for
 
this
 
alarm
 
system
.
 
Some
 
cities
 
and
 
municipalities
 
may
 
require
 
an
 
alarm
 
system
 
permit.
 
Before
 
installing
 
this
 
system,
 
always
 
ensure
 
that
 
you
 
are
 
in
 
compliance
 
with
 
any
 
national,
 
regional,
 
and
 
local
 
laws,
 
rules,
 
and/or
 
guidelines.

This
 
system
 
is
 
intended
 
for
 
use
 
with
 
approved

model
 
smoke
 
alarms
 
only
.
 
For
 
use
 
as
 
a
 
smoke
 
alarm
 
system,
 
there
 
must
 
be
 
at
 
least
 
one
 
(1)
 
smoke
 
alarm
 
programmed
 
into
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
and
 
must
 
use
 
only
 
approved
 
model
 
smoke
 
alarms.
 
Visit
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Dealer
 
Web
 
Site
 
at
 
dealer.2gig.com.

Failure
 
to
 
follow
 
ETL
 
requirements
 
voids
 
this
 
system’s
 
ETL
 
Listed
 
mark
.
 
Failure
 
to
 
install
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
and
 
accessories
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
the
 
ETL
 
requirements
 
documented
 
in
 
this
 
manual
 
voids
 
its
 
ETL
 
Listed
 
Mark. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
6
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Installing the System in Commercial Settings
When
 
installing
 
the
 
system
 
in
 
a
 
commercial
 
setting,
 
be
 
aware
 
of
 
the
 
following:

The
 
sy

stem
 
cannot
 
be
 
used
 
for
 
fire
 
protection
 
in
 
commercial
 
settings
.
 
In
 
a
 
commercial
 
setting,
 
it
 
is
 
important
 
to
 
know
 
that
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
neither
 
designed
 
nor
 
intended
 
for
 
use
 
as
 
a
 
fire
 
protection
 
system.
 

The
 
sy

stem
 
is
 
intended
 
only
 
for
 
security
 
protection
 
of
 
premises
.
 
In
 
a
 
commercial
 
setting,
 
this
 
system
 
is
 
only
 
intended
 
for
 
protection
 
of
 
commercial
 
premises,
 
such
 
as
 
a
 
mercantile
 
or
 
office.
 
It
 
is
 
neither
 
designed
 
nor
 
intended
 
to
 
protect
 
commercial
 
bank
 
vaults.
 

A
 
pe

rmit
 
may
 
be
 
required
 
for
 
this
 
alarm
.
 
Some
 
cities
 
and
 
municipalities
 
may
 
require
 
an
 
alarm
 
system
 
permit.
 
Before
 
installing
 
this
 
system,
 
always
 
ensure
 
that
 
you
 
are
 
in
 
compliance
 
with
 
any
 
national,
 
regional,
 
and
 
local
 
laws,
 
rules,
 
and/or
 
guidelines.
System Features
The
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
system
 
offers
 
security
 
protection
 
for
 
your
 
property,
 
24

hour
 
emergency
 
monitoring,
 
and
 
can
 
optionally
 
be
 
used
 
for
 
fire
 
detection
 
in
 
the
 
home.
 
Features
 
include:

Full
 
Vo

ice
 
Response
.
 
The
 
panel
 
gives
 
clear
 
notifications
 
that
 
indicate
 
system
 
status,
 
zone
 
descriptions,
 
alarms,
 
and
 
emergencies.

Dat

e,
 
Time,
 
and
 
Weather
 
Display
.*
 
Scroll
 
through
 
the
 
date,
 
time,
 
and
 
daily
 
weather
 
forecast.
 
Provides
 
the
 
ability
 
to
 
receive
 
messages,
 
including
 
severe
 
weather
 
warnings.

Quic

k
 
Access
.
 
The
 
one
 
touch
 
access
 
buttons
 
allow
 
the
 
quickest
 
help
 
possible
 
in
 
an
 
emergency.
 
The
 
front
 
panel
 
 
and
 
 
buttons
 
serve
 
as
 
controls
 
as
 
well
 
as
 
indicators.
 
Pressing
 
the
 
 
button
 
displays
 
emergency
 
icons
 
on
 
the
 
display
 
fo

r
 
Panic,
 
Fire,
 
and
 
Emergency
 
alarm
 
activation
 
(each
 
has
 
programmable
 
options
 
and
 
can
 
be
 
enabled
 
or
 
disabled).
 
Pressing
 
the
 
button
 
changes
 
the
 
system
 
display
 
to
 
the
 
Home
 
screen

Full
 
Color
 
To
uch
 
Screen
.
 
Control
 
all
 
system
 
functions
 
with
 
an
 
easy

to

use
 
color
 
touch
 
screen
 
puts
 
a
 
wide
 
range
 
of
 
security
 
and
 
home
 
automation
 
controls
 
at
 
your
 
fingertips.

Multiple
 
Arming
 
O
ptions
.
 
Secure
 
your
 
home
 
by
 
arming
 
your
 
system
 
“AWAY”
 
or
 
“STAY.”
 
The
 
Quick
 
Arm/Exit
 
and
 
Bypass
 
features
 
offer
 
added
 
convenience.

Ho

me
 
Automation
 
Radio
 
Module
.
 
The
 
built
 
in
 
Z

Wave
 
radio
 
enables
 
various
 
home
 
automation
 
functions
 
including
 
HVAC,
 
appliances,
 
lighting,
 
and
 
lock
 
control.

Tw

o
 
(2)

way
 
Response
 
Over
 
Cellular
.*
 
Two

way
 
voice
 
lets
 
central
 
station
 
operators
 
listen
 
in
 
and
 
talk
 
to
 
you
 
when
 
a
 
signal
 
is
 
received,
 
ensuring
 
that
 
the
 
proper
 
emergency
 
response
 
personnel
 
will
 
be
 
dispatched
 
if
 
necessary.

Fully
 
Se

lf

Contained
.
 
The
 
fully
 
self

contained
 
panel
 
contains
 
a
 
backup
 
battery,
 
and
 
allows
 
60
 
user
 
codes
 
and
 
monitors
 
up
 
to
 
60
 
wireless
 
zones
 
including
 
eight
 
(8)
 
key
 
fobs
 
and
 
four
 
(4)
 
keypads.
 
It
 
also
 
provides
 
two
 
(2)
 
hardwired
 
loops,
 
15
 
sensor
 
types,
 
a
 
supervised
 
bell
 
output,
 
and
 
a
 
programmable
 
solid

sta

te
 
control
 
output.

Over

Th

e

Air
 
(OTA)
 
Updates
.*
 
There’s
 
no
 
need
 
to
 
worry
 
about
 
the
 
panel’s
 
software
 
becoming
 
outdated.
 
With
 
the
 
OTA
 
function,
 
the
 
panel
 
can
 
be
 
remotely
 
updated
 
with
 
the
 
latest
 
software.

Re

mote
 
Control
 
Options
.*
 
Always
 
be
 
in
 
control
 
by
 
remotely
 
managing
 
your
 
system
 
from
 
a
 
computer
 
or
 
web

enabled
 
mobile
 
phone
 
(iPhone,
 
Android,
 
etc,).
*
 
Feature
 
requires
 
the
 
optional
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
module
 
and
 
an
 
active
 
account
 
with
 
an
 
Remote
 
Service
 
Provider.
  Introduction
Copyright © 2016 Nortek
Security & Control
7
Optional Accessories
Optional
 
modules,
 
keypads,
 
radios,
 
and
 
sensors
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
purchased
 
to
 
enhance
 
the
 
system
 
include:
 

2GIG
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
.
 
An
 
on

board
 
digital
 
communicators
 
reports
 
alarms
 
and
 
trouble
 
to
 
a
 
Central
 
Station
 
receiver
 
via
 
the
 
standard
 
telephone
 
network
 
and
 
a
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
voice
 
communication
 
with
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
It
 
also
 
supports
 
OTA
 
updates
 
and
 
remote
 
control
 
of
 
the
 
system
 
using
 
telephone
 
or
 
a
 
Web

enabled
 
device
 
through
 
the
 
Internet.

2GIG
 
900
 
MHz
 
Transceiver
 
Module
.
 
it
 
sends
 
and
 
receives
 
signals
 
with
 
wireless
 
touch
 
screen
 
keypads
 
and
 
image
 
sensors.
 
Touch
 
screen
 
keypads
 
allow
 
remote
 
control
 
of
 
the
 
system
 
through
 
the
 
same
 
graphic
 
interface
 
design
 
as
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
Note
 
that
 
the
 
2GIG
 
900
 
MHz
 
Transceiver
 
Module,
 
touch
 
screen
 
keypad,
 
and
 
image
 
sensor
 
are
 
only
 
available
 
in
 
some
 
regions.

2GIG
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypad
.
 
A
 
wall

mounted,
 
full

color,
 
touch
 
screen
 
interface
 
that
 
provides
 
many
 
of
 
the
 
same
 
easy

to

use
 
keypad
 
functions
 
available
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
It
 
is
 
designed
 
for
 
indoor
 
use
 
only
 
and
 
gives
 
users
 
the
 
ability
 
to
 
control
 
lights,
 
thermostats,
 
and
 
door
 
locks,
 
as
 
well
 
as
 
to
 
view
 
the
 
status
 
of
 
every
 
sensor
 
zone.
 
When
 
the
 
2GIG
 
900
 
MHz
 
Transceiver
 
Module
 
is
 
installed
 
in
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
the
 
system
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
to
 
communicate
 
with
 
up
 
to
 
four
 
(4)
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypads.

2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module
.
 
The
 
POTS
 
(Plain
 
Old
 
Telephone
 
Service)
 
module
 
offers
 
the
 
same
 
features
 
and
 
the
 
cellular
 
module
 
only
 
over
 
a
 
land

line
 
(instead
 
of
 
cellular),
 
such
 
as
 
two
 
(2)

way

voice
 
communication
 
with
 
the
 
remote
 
monitoring
 
service.

2GIG
 
Go!Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
.
 
The
 
Go!Bridge
 
provides
 
Internet
 
connectivity
 
between
 
the
 
monitoring
 
service’s
 
Central
 
Station
 
and
 
the
 
Go!Control®
 
Panel
 
(requires
 
the
 
2GIG
 
900
 
MHz
 
Transceiver
 
Module
 
and
 
supports
 
automatic
 
firmware
 
updates,
 
provides
 
interactive
 
security
 
services,
 
and
 
increases
 
supervision
 
using
 
signal

forwarding
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.

2GIG
 
Super
 
Switch
 
Takeover
 
Module
.
 
The
 
takeover
 
module
 
communicates
 
with
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Control
 
Panel
 
and
 
is
 
designed
 
to
 
convert
 
up
 
to
 
eight
 
(8)
 
pre

wired
 
zones
 
to
 
supervised
 
wireless
 
zones.

2GIG
 
Hardwire
 
Conversion
 
Kit
.
 
This
 
kit
 
provides
 
installers
 
with
 
an
 
easy
 
way
 
to
 
convert
 
the
 
zones
 
of
 
a
 
pre

wired
 
security
 
alarm
 
system
 
to
 
2GIG
 
wireless
 
zones.
 
The
 
kit
 
includes
 
one
 
(1)
 
Super
 
Switch
 
Takeover
 
Module
 
(Wireless
 
Takeover
 
of
 
an
 
Alarm
 
System,
 
US
 
Patent
 
No.
 
8,638,218).
 
You
 
can
 
also
 
install
 
two
 
(2)
 
additional
 
modules,
 
which
 
provides
 
installers
 
with
 
the
 
capability
 
to
 
convert
 
up
 
to
 
24
 
pre

wired
 
security
 
zones
 
to
 
wireless
 
zones. 8
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
System Configuration
This
 
illustration
 
details
 
the
 
entire
 
system
 
configuration
 
(including
 
optional
 
features).
 
See
 
"Optional
 
Accessories"
 
on
 
page
 
7.
Figure 1
Complete System Configuration Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
9
Control Panel Features
External Features
Figure 2
Control Panel External Features
A
Alarm
 
Sounder
 
and
 
Speaker
Sounds
 
all
 
system
 
local
 
alarms,
 
voice
 
prompts,
 
system
 
sounds,
 
and
 
audio
 
for
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
voice
 
communications
 
with
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
B
Color
 
Display
 
with
 
Touchscreen
Shows
 
all
 
system
 
information,
 
status,
 
programming,
 
and
 
functions
 
as
 
the
 
keypad.
 
Display
 
cycles
 
clock,
 
calendar,
 
and
 
weather
 
with
 
an
 
Alarm.com
 
account
 
(tap
 
manually
 
to
 
change)
C
Microphone
For
 
voice
 
communication
 
with
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
D
Emergency
 
Button/Indicator
Lights
 
WHITE
 
when
 
enabled
 
for
 
emergency
 
alarms
 
and
 
flashes
 
during
 
emergency
 
alarms
E
Home
 
Button/Indicator
Sensor
 
Status

Lights
 
GREEN
 
when
 
all
 
sensors
 
are
 
closed
 
(ready
 
to
 
arm)

Not
 
lit
 
when
 
any
 
sensor
 
is
 
open
 
(not
 
ready
 
to
 
arm)
Arming
 
Status

Lights
 
RED
 
when
 
system
 
is
 
armed

Flashes
 
RED
 
during
 
the
 
Entry
 
Delay
Alarm
 
Memory

Flashes
 
RED
 
during
 
an
 
alarm

Flashes
 
RED
 
after
 
an
 
alarm
 
while
 
system
 
is
 
still
 
armed
Power
 
Outage

Flashes
 
WHITE
 
during
 
power
 
outage
 
(system
 
on
 
battery
 
backup)

Flashes
 
GREEN
 
when
 
all
 
sensors
 
are
 
closed
 
(ready
 
to
 
arm)

Flashes
 
ORANGE
 
when
 
any
 
sensor
 
is
 
open
 
(not
 
ready
 
to
 
arm)

Flashes
 
RED
 
while
 
system
 
is
 
armed Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
10
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Internal Features
Figure 3
Control Panel Internal Features
A
Backup
 
Battery
 
Pack
The
 
standard
 
backup
 
battery
 
that
 
is
 
included
 
with
 
all
 
2GIG
 
Control
 
Panels
 
does
 
not
 
support
 
UL
 
985
 
installations.
 
To
 
comply
 
with
 
the
 
secondary
 
supply
 
requirement
 
in
 
UL
 
985
 
Household
 
Fire
 
Warning
 
System
 
Units
,
 
you
 
must
 
install
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Console
 
Battery
 
Pack
 
(2GIG

BATT2X).
B
Telephone
 
Jack
Used
 
for
 
RJ45
 
connection
 
to
 
installation's
 
RJ31X
 
telephone
 
jack.
 
See
 
"Optional
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
16.
C
Terminal
 
Block
Connections
 
for
 
power,
 
solid
 
state
 
output
 
bell,
 
and
 
hardwire
 
loops.
D
Alternate
 
Power
 
Supply
Alternate
 
connection
 
for
 
power.
 
(Plug

in
 
barrel
 
connector)
E
J4
 
Pin
 
Connector
Connector
 
for
 
the
 
Firmware
 
Update
 
Cable
 
used
 
to
 
update
 
the
 
firmware
 
version
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
F
Optional
 
Receiver
 
Module
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module
 
for
 
over

the

air
 
communication
 
with
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
See
 
"Optional
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
16.
G
Main
 
Receiver
 
Module
Receiver
 
for
 
peripheral
 
device
 
transmissions
 
(or
 
an
 
optional
 
2GIG
 
900
 
MHz
 
Transceiver
 
Module
 
for
 
use
 
with
 
the
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypad).
H
POTS
 
Module
 
(Optional)
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module
 
for
 
connecting
 
the
 
lineman's
 
phone
 
(a.k.a.,
 
buttset
)
 
for
 
monitoring
 
the
 
telephone
 
line.
 
See
 
"Optional
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
16.
I
Third

Hand
 
Hanger
 
Strap
Hooks
 
onto
 
mounting
 
plate
 
during
 
installation
 
to
 
hold
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
while
 
wiring. Copyright © 2016 Nortek
Security & Control
11
Installation Outline
Use
 
the
 
following
 
outline
 
in
 
conjunction
 
with
 
this
 
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
 
to
 
guide
 
you
 
through
 
the
 
installation
 
steps.
1
Unpack
 
the
 
system
 
and
 
identify
 
the
 
system
 
components.
2
Create
 
an
 
Installation
 
Floor
 
Plan
 
to
 
determine
 
the
 
best
 
centralized
 
location
 
for
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
3
Decide
 
where
 
to
 
best
 
install
 
the
 
wired
 
and/or
 
wireless
 
sensors.
 
Guidelines
 
are
 
available
 
in
 
the
 
Installation
 
Instructions
 
included
 
with
 
each
 
sensor.
 
4
Identify
 
an
 
unswitched
 
wall
 
outlet
 
to
 
use
 
for
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
power
 
supply.
 
5
(Optional)
 
Install
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
in
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
See
 
"GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
17
.
NOTE:
(Optional)
 
If
 
installing
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module,
 
identify
 
or
 
install
 
a
 
USOC.
 
RJ31X
 
telephone
 
jack
 
to
 
connect
 
the
 
module
 
to
 
the
 
phone
 
line.
 
See
 
"Optional
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
16
.
6
Use
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
backplate
 
to
 
mark
 
the
 
drywall
 
cutouts
 
for
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
Then
 
make
 
the
 
cutouts
 
and
 
attach
 
the
 
backplate
 
to
 
the
 
wall.
 
See
 
"Control
 
Panel
 
Mounting
 
Plate"
 
on
 
page
 
14
.
7
Install
 
each
 
of
 
the
 
system’s
 
wireless
 
sensors.
 
If
 
either
 
of
 
the
 
two
 
hardwire
 
loops
 
are
 
going
 
to
 
be
 
used,
 
install
 
the
 
contacts
 
and
 
route
 
the
 
loop
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
wall
 
cutout.
8
Install
 
the
 
optional
 
hardwired
 
sounder,
 
and
 
route
 
the
 
connection
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
wall
 
cutout.
9
If
 
used,
 
route
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
from
 
the
 
RJ31X
 
jack
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
wall
 
cutout.
10
Use
 
the
 
third

hand
 
hanger
 
strap
 
to
 
hang
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
on
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate.
 
Then
 
connect
 
all
 
wiring
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
terminal
 
block.
 
See
 
"Control
 
Panel
 
Wiring"
 
on
 
page
 
19
 
and
 
"Terminal
 
Block
 
Wiring
 
Diagram"
 
on
 
page
 
20
.
 
If
 
you
 
install
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module,
 
plug
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
into
 
the
 
POTS
 
module.
 
See
 
"Optional
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
16
.
11
Plug
 
the
 
backup
 
battery
 
connector
 
into
 
the
 
connector
 
on
 
the
 
circuit
 
board.
12
Swing
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
up,
 
placing
 
the
 
bottom
 
over
 
the
 
lip
 
of
 
the
 
mounting
 
bracket.
 
Push
 
the
 
top
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
into
 
the
 
mounting
 
bracket
 
until
 
it
 
snaps
 
into
 
place,
 
then
 
secure
 
it
 
with
 
the
 
retaining
 
screw.
13
Plug
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
into
 
the
 
unswitched
 
wall
 
outlet.
14
Program
 
the
 
system
 
as
 
described
 
in
 
this
 
manual
 
and
 
document
 
any
 
custom
 
setup
 
options
 
for
 
the
 
end
 
user
 
in
 
the
 
space
 
provided
 
in
 
the
 
User
 
Guide
.
15
Test
 
the
 
system
 
as
 
described
 
"Installer
 
Testing"
 
on
 
page
 
67
.
16
Educate
 
the
 
end
 
user(s)
 
about
 
basic
 
system
 
operations
 
and
 
provide
 
them
 
with
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
User
 
Guide
. 12
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Wireless Installation Tips
When
 
installing
 
any
 
wireless
 
system,
 
consider
 
certain
 
limitations.
 
Low
 
power
 
wireless
 
transmitter
 
signals
 
do
 
NOT
 
broadcast
 
equally
 
through
 
all
 
types
 
of
 
construction
 
materials.
 
However,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
does
 
contain
 
a
 
sensitive
 
receiver
 
that
 
typically
 
allows
 
for
 
placement
 
of
 
transmitters
 
in
 
nearly
 
all
 
locations.
 
To
 
determine
 
the
 
best
 
possible
 
placement
 
for
 
wireless
 
sensors,
 
review
 
the
 
following
 
illustration.
Figure 4
Wireless Installation Tips Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
13
Sensors and Accessories
Wireless System Sensors
•Thin
 
Door/Window
 
Contact
•Recessed
 
Door
 
Contact
•Passive
 
Infrared
 
(PIR)
 
Motion
 
Detector
•Four
 
(4)

Button
 
Keyfob
 
Remote
•Panic
 
Button
 
Remote
•Glass
 
Break
 
Detector
•Wireless
 
Smoke/Heat
 
Alarm
•Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypad
•Wireless
 
Keypad
•Super
 
Switch
 
Takeover
 
Module
 
(Wireless
 
Takeover
 
of
 
an
 
Alarm
 
System,
 
US
 
Patent
 
No.
 
8,638,218)
System Accessories
•GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
•Internal
 
Antenna
•External
 
In

Wall
 
Antenna
•External
 
Attic
 
Mount
 
Antenna
•Standard
 
Battery
 
Pack
 
(UL
 
1023)
•Console
 
Battery
 
Pack
 
(UL
 
985)
•Replacement
 
Power
 
Supply
•Go!Bridge™
 
IP
 
Communicator
•Hardwire
 
Conversion
 
Kit 14
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Installation
Control Panel Mounting Plate
Mount
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
on
 
the
 
wall
 
in
 
a
 
convenient
 
location
 
(or
 
use
 
the
 
optional
 
desk
 
mount).
 
These
 
tools
 
may
 
be
 
required
 
to
 
mount
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
onto
 
the
 
wall:
•Screwdriver
•Wire
 
Stripper
•Staple
 
Gun
•Drywall
 
Saw
 
(or
 
equivalent)
•Ladder
1
Remove
 
the
 
locking
 
screw
 
from
 
the
 
top
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
case
 
and
 
remove
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate.
2
Use
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate
 
as
 
a
 
template
 
to
 
mark
 
the
 
wall
 
for
 
the
 
wiring
 
cutout
 
slot.
 
Use
 
a
 
drywall
 
saw
 
to
 
cut
 
the
 
slot.
 
3
If
 
using
 
the
 
optional
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
with
 
an
 
external
 
antenna,
 
remove
 
the
 
plastic
 
knockout
 
labeled
 
“EXTERNAL
 
ANTENNA”
 
on
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate.
 
Mark
 
and
 
cut
 
a
 
slot
 
in
 
the
 
drywall
 
for
 
the
 
external
 
antenna.
4
Attach
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate
 
to
 
the
 
wall
 
using
 
three
 
(3)
 
screws.
Figure 5
Control Panel Mounting Plate
Wireless Sensors
Install
 
wireless
 
sensors
 
in
 
the
 
appropriate
 
location
 
using
 
the
 
Installation
 
Instructions
 
included
 
with
 
each
 
wireless
 
sensor
 
as
 
a
 
guide.
Hardwired Loops
Hardwired
 
loops
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
either
 
Normally
 
Open
 
(N/O)
 
or
 
Normally
 
Closed
 
(N/C).
 
End

of

Line
 
Resistors
 
(EOLR)
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
used
 
to
 
supervise
 
the
 
loops.
 
Only
 
contacts
 
should
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
the
 
hardwired
 
loops.
 
NOTE:
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
does
 
not
 
support
 
powering
 
external
 
devices
 
(PIR’s,
 
etc.).
NOTE:
Hardwired
 
loops
 
cannot
 
be
 
used
 
for
 
a
 
CO
 
or
 
Fire
 
sensor
 
loop.
1
If
 
either
 
of
 
the
 
two
 
(2)
 
hardwired
 
loops
 
are
 
going
 
to
 
be
 
used,
 
install
 
the
 
contacts
 
and
 
then
 
route
 
the
 
loop
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
wall
 
cutout.
2
If
 
end

of

line
 
supervision
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
the
 
loop,
 
install
 
a
 
2.2k
Ω 
resistor
 
(not
 
supplied)
 
as
 
shown
 
in
 
Figure
 
6
 
 
Hardwired
 
Loop
 
Wiring
.
A
Mounting
 
plate
B
Remove
 
case
 
screw
 
and
 
mounting
 
plate
C
If
 
using
 
external
 
antenna,
 
remove
 
knockout
 
plate.
D
Use
 
mounting
 
plate
 
as
 
a
 
template
 
to
 
mark
 
wire
 
cutout
 
hole
 
in
 
dry
 
wall.
E
Mount
 
plate
 
with
 
three
 
(3)
 
screws. Installation
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
15
Wiring
Hardwired
 
loops
 
need
 
to
 
be
 
programmed
 
for
 
contact
 
type.
Figure 6
Hardwired Loop Wiring
WARNING:
Stranded
 
conductors
 
clamped
 
under
 
wire

binding
 
screws
 
or
 
similar
 
parts
 
shall
 
have
 
the
 
individual
 
strands
 
soldered
 
together
 
or
 
arranged
 
in
 
a
 
construction
 
that
 
has
 
been
 
determined
 
to
 
be
 
the
 
equivalent.
Remote Alarm Sounder
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
provides
 
two
 
(2)
 
terminals
 
for
 
an
 
optional
 
connection
 
to
 
a
 
remote
 
electronic
 
alarm
 
sounder.
Figure 7
Remote Alarm Sounder
WARNING:
To
 
avoid
 
damage
 
to
 
the
 
output,
 
do
 
NOT
 
connect
 
an
 
electromechanical
 
bell
 
to
 
these
 
terminals.
The
 
bell
 
terminals
 
can
 
be
 
supervised.
 
If
 
Q21:
 
Siren
 
Supervision
 
Time
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Enabled
,
 
and
 
the
 
wire
 
between
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
and
 
sounder
 
is
 
cut,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
displays
 
a
 
trouble
 
alert
 
message
 
for
 
siren
 
supervision
 
and
 
sends
 
a
 
bell
 
trouble
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
1
Install
 
the
 
remote
 
sounder
 
in
 
a
 
secure
 
location
 
where
 
it
 
will
 
be
 
easily
 
heard
 
by
 
occupants.
2
Route
 
wiring
 
from
 
the
 
remote
 
sounder
 
location
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
wall
 
cutout.
NOTE:
If
 
the
 
piezo
 
alarm
 
siren
 
for
 
the
 
remote
 
sounder
 
has
 
an
 
extremely
 
low
 
current
 
draw
 
or
 
the
 
sounder
 
produces
 
hum
 
or
 
noise,
 
install
 
an
 
820
Ω 
resistor
 
in
 
parallel
 
with
 
the
 
sounder. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
16
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Solid State Output
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
provides
 
one
 
(1)
 
solid
 
state
 
output
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
to
 
activate
 
during
 
various
 
conditions.
 
The
 
output
 
can
 
switch
 
up
 
to
 
250
 
mA
 
@
 
16
 
VDC
 
to
 
ground.
NOTE:
For
 
ETL
 
Listing,
 
an
 
external
 
DC
 
Backup
 
Power
 
Supply
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
a
 
load
 
connected
 
to
 
Terminal
 
4.
NOTE:
When
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
connected
 
with
 
an
 
AC
 
power
 
source,
 
Terminal
 
1
 
provides
 
DC
 
Power
 
only.
Figure 8
Solid State Output
This
 
output
 
only
 
functions
 
while
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
receiving
 
power
 
from
 
the
 
wall
 
power
 
supply.
1
Install
 
the
 
device
 
to
 
be
 
controlled
 
by
 
the
 
solid
 
state
 
output.
2
Route
 
wiring
 
from
 
the
 
device
 
location
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
wall
 
cutout.
WARNING:
To
 
avoid
 
damage
 
to
 
the
 
output,
 
do
 
NOT
 
connect
 
an
 
electromechanical
 
bell
 
to
 
these
 
terminals.
Optional 2GIG Go!Control POTS Module
To
 
use
 
the
 
telephone
 
jack,
 
you
 
must
 
install
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module.
 
Both
 
the
 
incoming
 
and
 
outgoing
 
telephone
 
line
 
can
 
be
 
connected.
 
Figure 9
2GIG Go!Control POTS Module
When
 
the
 
digital
 
communicator
 
activates,
 
all
 
local
 
telephones
 
are
 
disconnected
 
to
 
prevent
 
an
 
off

hook
 
telephone
 
on
 
the
 
premises
 
from
 
blocking
 
the
 
digital
 
communicator’s
 
call.
Figure 10
2GIG Go!Control POTS Module Installation Installation
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
17
See
 
"Wire
 
Size
 
and
 
Length"
 
on
 
page
 
20
 
for
 
wire
 
size
 
and
 
maximum
 
length.
1
Run
 
a
 
four
 
(4)

conductor
 
telephone
 
cable
 
from
 
the
 
telephone
 
company’s
 
demarcation
 
point
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
mounting
 
plate.
 
2
Install
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Control
 
POTS
 
Module
 
into
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
WARNING:
To
 
reduce
 
the
 
risk
 
of
 
fire,
 
use
 
only
 
No.
 
26
 
AWG
 
or
 
larger
 
telecommunication
 
line
 
cord
 
for
 
phone
 
line
 
communications.
3
At
 
the
 
demarcation
 
point,
 
do
 
the
 
following:
3a
Disconnect
 
only
 
the
 
house
 
telephones
 
that
 
are
 
wired
 
to
 
the
 
box
 
output.
 
Do
 
not
 
disturb
 
the
 
telco
 
input
 
“drop”
 
side
 
of
 
the
 
box
 
or
 
any
 
earth
 
grounds.
3b
Connect
 
the
 
RED
 
cable
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
box
 
Ring
,
 
and
 
the
 
GREEN
 
cable
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
box
 
Tip
.
3c
Connect
 
the
 
BLACK
 
cable
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
house
 
telephone
 
Ring
 
wire(s),
 
and
 
the
 
YELLOW
 
cable
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
house
 
telephone
 
Tip
 
wire(s).
4
At
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
do
 
the
 
following:
4a
Connect
 
the
 
cable’s
 
RED
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
RJ31X
 
jack’s
 
Ring
 
in
 
terminal,
 
and
 
the
 
GREEN
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
RJ31Xjack’s
 
Tip
 
in
 
terminal.
4b
Connect
 
the
 
cable’s
 
BLACK
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
RJ31X
 
jack’s
 
Ring
 
out
 
terminal,
 
and
 
the
 
YELLOW
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
RJ31Xjack’s
 
Tip
 
out
 
terminal.
4c
Snap
 
the
 
cover
 
on
 
the
 
jack.
 
4d
Plug
 
one
 
end
 
of
 
the
 
modular
 
cable
 
into
 
the
 
jack
 
and
 
slide
 
it
 
through
 
the
 
hole
 
in
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate
 
into
 
the
 
wall.
5
Power
 
ON
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
6
Access
 
the
 
System
 
Configuration
 
screen
 
as
 
follows:
6a
At
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
tap
 
the
 
system
 
logo
 
in
 
the
 
lower

right
 
corner.
 
6b
At
 
the
 
Enter
 
Your
 
Code
 
screen,
 
enter
 
the
 
master
 
installer
 
code
 
(the
 
default
 
code
 
is
 
1561).
 
6c
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
screen,
 
tap
 
System
 
Configuration
.
6d
Tap
 
Go
 
To
 
and
 
then
 
enter
 
the
 
code
 
shown
 
below
 
to
 
respond
 
to
 
these
 
programming
 
questions:
 
•Enter
 
08
.
 
For
 
details,
 
see
"Q8:
 
Dialer
 
(0

1)"
 
on
 
page
 
52
.
•Enter
 
11
.
 
For
 
details,
 
see
 
"Q11:
 
CS
 
#1
 
Phone
 
Number
 
(0

25
 
Digits)"
 
on
 
page
 
53
.
•Enter
 
12
.
 
For
 
details,
 
see
 
"Q12:
 
CS
 
#1
 
Account
 
Number
 
(4
 
Digits)"
 
on
 
page
 
53
.
IMPORTANT:
You
 
must
 
program
 
the
 
module
 
in
 
order
 
to
 
use
 
it
 
with
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
Figure 11
Control Panel with 2GIG Go!Control POTS Module
GSM (Cellular) Radio Module
If
 
installing
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module,
 
see
 
below:
Figure 12
In-Wall Antenna Installation
NOTE:
The
 
routing
 
of
 
the
 
antenna
 
wire
 
is
 
critical.
 
You
 
must
 
route
 
the
 
wire
 
exactly
 
as
 
directed
 
or
 
cell
 
radio
 
interference
 
will
 
occur.
1
When
 
using
 
external
 
antennas,
 
plug
 
the
 
antenna
 
connector
 
into
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module.
 
The
 
antenna
 
drops
 
into
 
the
 
wall
 
or
 
mounts
 
in
 
the
 
attic
 
with
 
A
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
Connector
B
End
 
of
 
antenna
 
hangs
 
down
 
inside
 
the
 
wall Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
18
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
the
 
cable
 
passing
 
through
 
the
 
slot
 
in
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
mounting
 
plate.
Figure 13
Attic Antenna Installation
The
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
should
 
already
 
be
 
activated
 
by
 
the
 
factory.
 
If
 
not,
 
contact
 
the
 
Remote
 
Service
 
Provider.
 
For
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
to
 
function,
 
it
 
must
 
be
 
activated
 
before
 
it
 
can
 
be
 
enrolled.
 
Enrollment
 
is
 
accomplished
 
by
 
creating
 
an
 
account
 
with
 
the
 
provider.
A
Attic
 
antenna
 
mounted
 
as
 
high
 
as
 
possible
B
Coaxial
 
cable
 
to
 
Control
 
Panel Installation
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
19
Control Panel Wiring
The
 
following
 
diagram
 
shows
 
you
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
wiring.
Figure 14
Control Panel Wiring Diagram Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
20
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Control Panel Wiring
The
 
third

hand
 
hanging
 
strap
 
allows
 
you
 
to
 
hang
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
on
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate
 
during
 
installation.
1
Hang
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
on
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate
 
by
 
the
 
third

hand
 
hanger
 
strap.
2
Connect
 
the
 
hardwire
 
loop,
 
external
 
sounder,
 
and
 
open
 
collector
 
output
 
wiring
 
(if
 
used)
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
terminal
 
block.
3
Plug
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
(if
 
used)
 
into
 
the
 
telephone
 
jack
 
on
 
the
 
POTS
 
Module.
Figure 15
Third-Hand Hanging Strap
Terminal Block Wiring Diagram
Figure 16
Terminal Block Wiring Diagram
Backup Battery Connection and Power
Supply Wiring
The
 
backup
 
battery
 
connects
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
circuit
 
board
 
with
 
a
 
two
 
(2)

pin
 
header
 
assembly.
The
 
power
 
supply
 
features
 
a
 
two
 
(2)

position
 
terminal
 
block
 
for
 
connecting
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
power
 
terminals
 
(connection
 
wire
 
not
 
included).
1
Locate
 
an
 
unswitched
 
wall
 
outlet
 
for
 
the
 
plug

in
 
power
 
supply.
WARNING:
Never
 
connect
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
to
 
switch

controlled
 
outlet.
2
Route
 
two
 
(2)

conductor
 
wire
 
from
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
location
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
mounting
 
plate.
 
For
 
wire
 
size
 
and
 
maximum
 
length,
 
see
 
"Wire
 
Size
 
and
 
Length"
 
on
 
page
 
20
.
3
Being
 
careful
 
to
 
observe
 
polarity,
 
connect
 
the
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
power
 
supply’s
 
DC+
 
and
 
DC
‐ 
terminals.
 
Do
 
NOT
 
plug
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
into
 
an
 
outlet
 
at
 
this
 
time.
4
Being
 
careful
 
to
 
observe
 
polarity,
 
connect
 
the
 
wire
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
input
 
terminals
 
14VDC
 
(+)
 
Terminal
 
1
 
and
 
14VDC
 
(

)
 
Terminal
 
2.
NOTE:
Grounding
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
NOT
 
required
 
for
 
proper
 
operation.
5
Plug
 
the
 
backup
 
battery
 
pack’s
 
connector
 
into
 
the
 
connector
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
circuit
 
board.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
does
 
not
 
recognize
 
that
 
the
 
battery
 
is
 
connected
 
until
 
AC
 
power
 
is
 
connected
 
to
 
the
 
power
 
supply.
NOTE:
The
 
standard
 
backup
 
battery
 
that
 
is
 
included
 
with
 
all
 
2GIG
 
Control
 
Panels
 
does
 
not
 
support
 
UL
 
985
 
installations.
 
To
 
comply
 
with
 
the
 
secondary
 
supply
 
requirement
 
in
 
UL
 
985:
 
Household
 
Fire
 
Warning
 
System
 
Units
,
 
install
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Console
 
Battery
 
Pack
 
(This
 
is
 
a
 
high

capacity
 
2600mAh
 
Ni

MH
 
replacement
 
battery
 
pack).
Wire Size and Length
To
 
ensure
 
proper
 
operation,
 
do
 
NOT
 
exceed
 
the
 
following
 
maximum
 
length
 
for
 
the
 
wire
 
size
 
installed:
TIP:
To
 
ensure
 
that
 
the
 
appropriate
 
wire
 
size
 
and
 
length
 
is
 
installed,
 
measure
 
the
 
voltage
 
between
 
the
 
power
 
connection
 
terminals
 
at
 
the
 
back
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
voltage
 
measured
 
must
 
not
 
fall
 
below
 
11
 
volts
 
DC
 
or
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
may
 
display
 
nuisance
 
“AC
 
Power
 
Loss”
 
messages
 
and
 
send
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Reports
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
See
 
"Q52:
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0

1)"
 
on
 
page
 
58.
A
Third

hand
 
hanging
 
strap
B
Hardwire
 
loops,
 
external
 
sounder,
 
and
 
open
 
collector
 
output
 
connected
 
to
 
terminals.
C
Telephone
 
jack
 
on
 
the
 
POTS
 
module
1
14
 
VDC
 
Power
 
Input
 
(+)
2
14
 
VDC
 
Power
 
Input
 
(

)
3
Ground
4
Open
 
Collector
5
Bell
 
(+)
6
Bell
 
(

)
7
Hardwire
 
Loop
 
1
8
Hardwire
 
Loop
 
2
Wire
 
Size
Maximum
 
Length
22
 
AWG
55
 
ft
 
(16.8
 
m)
20
 
AWG
85
 
ft
 
(25.9
 
m)
22
 
AWG
 
2

pairs

(19
 
AWG
 
equivalent)
110
 
ft
 
(33.5
 
m)
18
 
AWG
135
 
ft
 
(41.1
 
m) Installation
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
21
NOTE:
In
 
the
 
United
 
States,
 
wiring
 
routed
 
inside
 
walls,
 
ceilings,
 
and
 
floors
 
must
 
comply
 
with
 
requirements
 
of
 
ANSI/NFPA
 
70:
 
National
 
Electrical
 
Code
 
(NEC)
 
and
 
local
 
building
 
codes.
 
For
 
wiring
 
from
 
the
 
output
 
of
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Class
 
II
 
Power
 
Supply,
 
wiring
 
rated
 
CL2,
 
CL2X,
 
CL2R,
 
or
 
PLTC
 
is
 
recommended
 
to
 
satisfy
 
these
 
requirements.
 
If
 
this
 
wiring
 
is
 
installed
 
in
 
an
 
air
 
plenum
 
(space
 
used
 
for
 
environmental
 
air
 
exchange)
 
it
 
must
 
be
 
rated
 
CL2P
 
(plenum

rated).
Figure 17
Power Supply Wiring
Control Panel and Power Supply
Mounting
After
 
all
 
the
 
wiring
 
complete,
 
follow
 
these
 
steps
 
to
 
power
 
up
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel:
1
Place
 
the
 
bottom
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
over
 
the
 
lower
 
lip
 
of
 
the
 
backplate
 
and
 
flip
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
upwards.
 
Then
 
push
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
over
 
the
 
mounting
 
bracket
 
until
 
it
 
snaps
 
into
 
place.
 
it
 
with
 
the
 
retaining
 
screw.
2
Peel
 
off
 
the
 
adhesive
 
backing
 
from
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
retaining
 
bracket
 
and
 
attach
 
the
 
bracket
 
to
 
the
 
outlet
 
with
 
a
 
wall
 
plate
 
screw.
Figure 18
Connecting Battery and Closing Panel
3
Spread
 
the
 
retaining
 
bracket
 
ears
 
and
 
plug
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
power
 
supply
 
into
 
the
 
unswitched
 
wall
 
outlet.
 
Slots
 
are
 
provided
 
on
 
the
 
bracket
 
to
 
secure
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
with
 
a
 
zip

tie.
4
After
 
about
 
five
 
(5)
 
seconds,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
indicates
 
that
 
power
 
has
 
been
 
applied.
 
If
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
does
 
not
 
power
 
up,
 
check
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
polarity.
Figure 19
Securing the Power Supply
NOTE:
In
 
the
 
United
 
States
 
(and
 
other
 
countries
 
where
 
it
 
is
 
required),
 
use
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
retaining
 
bracket.
 
In
 
Canada,
 
the
 
power
 
supply
 
retaining
 
bracket
 
is
 
not
 
required.
A
Left
 
Terminal
 
14
 
VDC
 
(+)
C
14
 
VDC
 
(+)
 
Terminal
 
1
B
Right
 
Terminal
 
14
 
VDC
 
(

)
D
14
 
VDC
 
(

)
 
Terminal
 
2
A
Connect
 
battery
B
Align
 
mounting
 
plate
 
inside
 
of
 
console
 
bottom
 
edge
C
Swing
 
console
 
up
 
and
 
snap
 
into
 
the
 
mounting
 
plate
D
Secure
 
console
 
with
 
screw
 
in
 
retaining
 
hole
1
Place
 
the
 
screw
 
here
 
for
 
a
 
bracket
 
on
 
a
 
standard
 
style
 
outlet.
2
Place
 
the
 
screw
 
here
 
for
 
a
 
bracket
 
on
 
a
 
decora
 
style
 
outlet. 22
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Commercial Installations
For
 
commercial
 
installations,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
designed
 
for
 
use
 
only
 
as
 
a
 
burglary
 
alarm
 
system,
 
and
 
not
 
for
 
fire
 
protection.
 
Installation
 
location
 
and
 
wiring
 
methods
 
shall
 
be
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
ANSI/NFPA
 
70:
 
National
 
Electric
 
Code
,
 
UL
 
681:
 
Installation
 
and
 
Classification
 
of
 
Burglar
 
and
 
Holdup
 
Alarm
 
Systems
,
 
and
 
UL
 
827:
 
Central

Station
 
Alarm
 
Services
.
 
NOTE:
When
 
used
 
with
 
the
 
Alarm.com
 
service,
 
this
 
security
 
system
 
has
 
been
 
evaluated
 
and
 
complies
 
with
 
UL
 
1610:
 
Central

Station
 
Burglar
 
Alarm
 
Units
.
 
For
 
commercial
 
UL
 
1610
 
installations,
 
you
 
must
 
install
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module.
 
See
 
"GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
17
.
NOTE:
All
 
entries
 
and
 
exits
 
within
 
a
 
commercial
 
installation
 
setup
 
must
 
be
 
protected
 
according
 
to
 
the
 
criteria
 
provided
 
by
 
UL
 
681:
 
Installation
 
and
 
Classification
 
of
 
Burglar
 
and
 
Holdup
 
Alarm
 
Systems
.
Figure 20
Commercial Installations Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
23
NFPA Standard 72
In
 
the
 
United
 
States
 
and
 
Canada,
 
smoke
 
detectors
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
National
 
Fire
 
Protection
 
Association
 
(NFPA)
 
Standard
 
72:
 
National
 
Fire
 
Alarm
 
and
 
Signaling
 
Code
,
 
which
 
reads
 
as
 
follows:
 

2

1.1.1
 
Smoke
 
alarms
 
shall
 
be
 
installed
 
outside
 
of
 
each
 
separate
 
sleeping
 
area
 
in
 
the
 
immediate
 
vicinity
 
of
 
the
 
bedrooms
 
and
 
on
 
each
 
additional
 
story
 
of
 
the
 
family
 
living
 
unit
 
including
 
basements
 
and
 
excluding
 
crawl
 
spaces
 
and
 
unfinished
 
attics.
 
In
 
new
 
construction,
 
a
 
smoke
 
alarm
 
shall
 
be
 
installed
 
in
 
each
 
sleeping
 
room.
2

1.1.2
 
For
 
family
 
living
 
units
 
with
 
one
 
or
 
more
 
split
 
levels
 
(i.e.,
 
adjacent
 
levels
 
with
 
less
 
than
 
one
 
full
 
story
 
separation
 
between
 
levels),
 
a
 
smoke
 
alarm
 
shall
 
suffice
 
for
 
an
 
adjacent
 
lower
 
level,
 
including
 
basements.
 
(Exception:
 
Where
 
there
 
is
 
an
 
intervening
 
door
 
between
 
one
 
level
 
and
 
the
 
adjacent
 
lower
 
level,
 
a
 
smoke
 
alarm
 
shall
 
be
 
installed
 
on
 
the
 
lower
 
level.)
•Ceiling
 
mounted
 
smoke
 
alarms
 
should
 
be
 
located
 
in
 
the
 
center
 
of
 
the
 
room
 
or
 
hall,
 
or
 
not
 
less
 
than
 
4
 
inches
 
from
 
any
 
wall.
 
When
 
the
 
alarm
 
is
 
mounted
 
on
 
a
 
wall,
 
the
 
top
 
of
 
the
 
alarm
 
should
 
be
 
4
 
to
 
12
 
inches
 
from
 
the
 
ceiling.
•Do
 
not
 
install
 
smoke
 
alarms
 
where
 
normal
 
ambient
 
temperatures
 
are
 
above
 
100°F
 
(37.8°C),
 
or
 
below
 
40°F
 
(4°C).
 
Also,
 
do
 
not
 
locate
 
alarm
 
in
 
front
 
of
 
air
 
conditioners,
 
heating
 
registers,
 
or
 
other
 
locations
 
where
 
normal
 
air
 
circulation
 
will
 
keep
 
smoke
 
from
 
entering
 
the
 
detector.
A

2.5.2.1
 
Smoke
 
Detection
 ‐ 
Are
 
More
 
Smoke
 
Alarms
 
Desirable?
 
The
 
required
 
number
 
of
 
smoke
 
alarms
 
might
 
not
 
provide
 
reliable
 
early
 
warning
 
protection
 
for
 
those
 
areas
 
separated
 
by
 
a
 
door
 
from
 
the
 
areas
 
protected
 
by
 
the
 
required
 
smoke
 
alarms.
 
For
 
this
 
reason,
 
it
 
is
 
recommended
 
that
 
the
 
residential
 
user
 
consider
 
the
 
use
 
of
 
additional
 
smoke
 
alarms
 
for
 
those
 
areas
 
for
 
increased
 
protection.
 
The
 
additional
 
areas
 
include
 
the
 
basement,
 
bedrooms,
 
dining
 
room,
 
furnace
 
room,
 
utility
 
room,
 
and
 
hallways
 
not
 
protected
 
by
 
the
 
required
 
smoke
 
alarms.
 
The
 
installation
 
of
 
smoke
 
alarms
 
in
 
kitchens,
 
attics
 
(finished
 
or
 
unfinished),
 
or
 
garages
 
is
 
not
 
normally
 
recommended,
 
as
 
these
 
locations
 
occasionally
 
experience
 
conditions
 
that
 
can
 
result
 
in
 
improper
 
operation
 
or
 
false
 
alarms.”
NOTE:
Smoke
 
alarms
 
are
 
not
 
to
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
detector
 
guards
 
unless
 
the
 
combination
 
has
 
been
 
evaluated
 
and
 
found
 
suitable
 
for
 
the
 
purpose.
Figure 21
Recommended Smoke Alarm Locations 24
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Main Display Screens
Home Screen
To
 
go
 
to
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
press
 
the
 
Home
  
button
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
Home
 
screen
 
reveals:

System
 
Status
.
 
The
 
status
 
of
 
the
 
system
 
appears
 
at
 
the
 
top
 
left
 
of
 
the
 
screen.
 
For
 
example,
 
System
 
Armed
 
or
 
System
 
Ready,
 
Not
 
Armed
.
 

Conditional
 
Messages
.
 
A
 
variety
 
of
 
conditional
 
messages
 
will
 
also
 
appear
 
under
 
the
 
System
 
Status.
 

Time,
 
Date
 
and
 
Weather
.
 
The
 
current
 
time,
 
date,
 
and
 
daily
 
weather
 
forecast
 
(when
 
the
 
system
 
includes
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
and
 
has
 
an
 
active
 
account
 
with
 
a
 
Remote
 
Services
 
Provider).

System
 
Status
 
Icons
.
 
Icons
 
in
 
the
 
top

right
 
corner
 
reveal
 
a
 
variety
 
of
 
conditions.
 
See
 
"System
 
Status
 
Icons"
 
on
 
page
 
28
.
Buttons
 
on
 
this
 
page
 
include:

Security
.
 
Opens
 
the
 
Security
 
screen.
 
See
 
Security
 
Screen
.

Services
.
 
Opens
 
the
 
Services
 
screen.
 
See
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
User
 
Guide
 
for
 
more
 
information.

Silent
 
Control
.
 
Opens
 
the
 
Bypass
 
screen.
 
See
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
User
 
Guide
 
for
 
more
 
information.

Display
 
OFF
.
 
Turn
 
OFF
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
screen.
Figure 22
Home Screen
Security Screen
The
 
Security
 
screen
 
displays
 
three
 
(3)
 
buttons
 
for
 
Arm
,
 
Menu
,
 
and
 
Status
.
 
It
 
also
 
shows
 
the
 
time,
 
date,
 
and
 
weather
 
display
 
(requires
 
that
 
the
 
feature
 
is
 
supported
 
by
 
the
 
Remote
 
Service
 
Provider).
 
Figure 23
Security Screen
Under
 
the
 
appropriate
 
conditions,
 
additional
 
buttons
 
include:

Trouble
 
Alerts
.
 
Displays
 
when
 
trouble
 
alerts
 
are
 
pending.

Messages
.
 
Displays
 
when
 
messages
 
are
 
pending.

Alarm
 
Memory
.
 
Displays
 
when
 
alarms
 
are
 
pending.
For
 
information
 
about
 
the
 
Silent
 
Control
 
button,
 
see
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
User
 
Guide
.
Arming Screen
The
 
Arming
 
screen
 
lets
 
users
 
arm
 
the
 
security
 
portion
 
of
 
the
 
system.
 
It
 
displays
 
the
 
system
 
status
 
and
 
arming
 
buttons
 
for
 
Stay
 
and
 
Away
 
mode.
 
It
 
also
 
includes
 
these
 
options:

Entry
 
Delay
 
Select
 
this
 
check
 
box
 
to
 
arm
 
the
 
system
 
with
 
an
 
entry
 
delay.
 
Clear
 
the
 
check
 
box
 
to
 
arm
 
the
 
system
 
without
 
an
 
entry
 
delay.
 
See
 
"(01)
 
Exit/Entry
 
1"
 
on
 
page
 
36
 
and
 
"(02)
 
Exit/Entry
 
2"
 
on
 
page
 
36
.

Silent
 
Exit
 
Select
 
this
 
check
 
box
 
to
 
silently
 
arm
 
the
 
system
 
without
 
sounding
 
the
 
exit
 
delay
 
beeps.
 
Arming
 
the
 
system
 
in
 
Stay
 
mode
 
always
 
uses
 
silent
 
exit.
Figure 24
Arming Screen
Menu Screen
The
 
Menu
 
screen
 
includes
 
the
 
Arm
 
and
 
Toolbox
 
buttons.
 
Figure 25
The Menu Screen
If
 
any
 
of
 
the
 
24

hour
 
emergency
 
options
 
are
 
enabled,
 
an
 
Emergency
 
button
 
also
 
appears.
 
It
 
also
 
includes
 
these
 
options:

Chime
 
Select
 
this
 
check
 
box
 
to
 
enable
 
system
 
chimes
 
and
 
clear
 
the
 
check
 
box
 
to
 
disable
 
system
 
chimes.
 
Note
 
that
 
chimes
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
enabled
 
or
 
disabled
 
for
 
each
 
sensor
 
number
 
by
 
tapping
 
Toolbox
 
and
 
then
 
Chimes
 
Setup
.

Voice
 
Select
 
this
 
check
 
box
 
to
 
enable
 
voice
 
announcements
 
for
 
the
 
system.
 
Voice
 
announcements
 
always
 
sound
 
during
 
alarm
 
conditions. Main Display Screens
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
25
System Status Screen
The
 
System
 
Status
 
screen
 
lists
 
system
 
status
 
and
 
any
 
alerts.
 
The
 
date
 
and
 
time
 
of
 
alerts
 
are
 
listed
 
in
 
the
 
displayed
 
log.
 
One
 
option
 
button
 
for
 
Silence
 
is
 
displayed;
 
it
 
temporarily
 
stops
 
the
 
announcement
 
of
 
the
 
system
 
status
 
during
 
the
 
status
 
display.
Figure 26
System Status Screen 26
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Toolbox and Installer Toolbox
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
includes
 
two
 
(2)
 
different
 
toolboxes
 
for
 
programming
 
the
 
system:

Toolbox
.
 
Individuals
 
with
 
a
 
user
 
code
 
can
 
access
 
basic
 
programming
 
functions
 
in
 
the
 
end
 
user
 
Toolbox.
 

Installer
 
Toolbox
.
 
Individuals
 
with
 
the
 
installer
 
code
 
can
 
access
 
both
 
the
 
basic
 
programming
 
functions
 
of
 
the
 
user
 
Toolbox
 
and
 
the
 
more
 
advanced
 
programming
 
functions
 
of
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox.
Toolbox Screens
The
 
Toolbox
 
provides
 
individuals
 
who
 
possess
 
a
 
user
 
code
 
with
 
the
 
ability
 
to
 
access
 
basic
 
programming
 
functions.
Accessing the Toolbox
To
 
access
 
the
 
basic
 
Toolbox
 
screens:
1
At
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Security
,
 
then
 
Menu
,
 
and
 
then
 
Toolbox
.
 
2
At
 
the
 
Enter
 
Your
 
Code
 
to
 
Access
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
screen,
 
enter
 
a
 
user
 
code
.
 
The
 
default
 
user
 
code
 
is
 
1111.
Figure 27
Enter Your Code Screen
3
When
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(1
 
of
 
3)
 
screen
 
appears,
 
tap
 
the
 
left
 
and
 
right
 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
between
 
the
 
different
 
screens.
Each
 
screen
 
provides
 
different
 
buttons
 
for
 
accessing
 
different
 
features.
Figure 28
Toolbox (1 of 3)
Figure 29
Toolbox (2 of 3)
Figure 30
Toolbox (3 of 3)
Installer Toolbox Screens
The
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
screen
 
provides
 
individuals
 
who
 
possess
 
the
 
installer
 
code
 
with
 
the
 
ability
 
to
 
access
 
a
 
variety
 
of
 
system
 
configuration
 
and
 
testing
 
buttons.
 
NOTE:
The
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
is
 
only
 
accessible
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed.
 
The
 
installer
 
code
 
does
 
NOT
 
disarm
 
the
 
system.
 
You
 
must
 
know
 
the
 
user
 
code
 
to
 
disarm
 
the
 
system.
Accessing the Installer Toolbox
There
 
are
 
two
 
(2)
 
ways
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel:
 
•At
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
tap
 
the
 
system
 
logo
 
in
 
the
 
lower

right
 
corner
 
and
 
then
 
tap
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
button.
 
Finally,
 
enter
 
the
 
installer
 
code
.
OR
•At
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Security
 
>
 
Menu
 
>
 
Toolbox
.
 
Then
 
tap
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
button
 
and
 
enter
 
the
 
installer
 
code
.
The
 
default
 
installer
 
code
 
is
 
1561.
 
To
 
learn
 
how
 
to
 
change
 
this
 
code,
 
see
 
Q43:
 
Installer
 
Code
 
(4
 
Digits)
.
Accessing the System Configuration for
System and Sensor Programming
To
 
access
 
the
 
system
 
configuration
 
screens
 
for
 
programming
 
sensors
 
into
 
the
 
system:
1
Tap
 
Disarm
 
and
 
enter
 
a
 
valid
 
user
 
code.
 
The
 
default
 
user
 
code
 
is
 
1111.
2
Access
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox.
 
See
 
Accessing
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
above.
3
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
screen,
 
tap
 
the
 
System
 
Configuration
 
button.
  Toolbox and Installer Toolbox
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
27
NOTE:
The
 
other
 
buttons
 
let
 
you
 
restore
 
the
 
default
 
Control
 
Panel
 
settings
 
and
 
provide
 
access
 
to
 
a
 
variety
 
of
 
system
 
tests.
Figure 31
Installer Toolbox Screen
After
 
tapping
 
the
 
System
 
Configuration
 
button,
 
the
 
first
 
programming
 
question
 
appears.
 
To
 
learn
 
more,
 
see
 
System
 
Configuration
 
Screens
.
System Configuration Screens
Use
 
the
 
System
 
Configuration
 
screens
 
to
 
program
 
sensors
 
into
 
the
 
system.
 
Installers
 
can
 
access
 
the
 
System
 
Configuration
 
screens
 
as
 
described
 
in
 
Accessing
 
the
 
System
 
Configuration
 
for
 
System
 
and
 
Sensor
 
Programming
.
The
 
System
 
Configuration
 
screens
 
present
 
installers
 
with
 
a
 
sequential
 
list
 
of
 
programming
 
questions.
 
For
 
a
 
list
 
of
 
all
 
available
 
programming
 
questions,
 
see
 
"Programming
 
Question
 
Table"
 
on
 
page
 
32.
Figure 32
Q1: Select RF Sensor # (01-48, 63-74).
TIP:
To
 
simplify
 
programming,
 
questions
 
are
 
arranged
 
so
 
that
 
commonly
 
used
 
values
 
appear
 
early
 
in
 
the
 
question
 
sequence.
  28
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
System Status Icons
The
 
top
 
line
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
display
 
is
 
the
 
status
 
bar
 
that
 
shows
 
the
 
current
 
system
 
mode,
 
the
 
status
 
of
 
the
 
sensors,
 
and
 
any
 
current
 
system
 
trouble
 
alerts.
 
Special
 
icons
 
are
 
displayed
 
on
 
the
 
right
 
side
 
to
 
provide
 
visual
 
indications
 
of
 
the
 
system’s
 
current
 
condition.
Figure 33
System Status Icons
AC Power On/OFF
Figure 34
AC Power ON
The
 
AC
 
Power
 
icon
 
shows
 
the
 
status
 
of
 
the
 
AC
 
power
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
A
 
WHITE
 
plug
 
appears
 
when
 
AC
 
power
 
is
 
present.
Figure 35
AC Power OFF
The
 
AC
 
Power
 
icon
 
shows
 
the
 
status
 
of
 
the
 
AC
 
power
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
A
 
RED
 
“X”
 
appears
 
over
 
the
 
WHITE
 
plug
 
when
 
AC
 
power
 
is
 
absent.
Phone Line Failure
Figure 36
Phone Line Failure
If
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
detects
 
that
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
is
 
disconnected,
 
the
 
phone
 
line
 
failure
 
icon
 
appears.
Sounder Disabled
Figure 37
Sounder Disabled
If
 
the
 
system’s
 
internal
 
sounder
 
has
 
been
 
lowered
 
and
 
external
 
sounder
 
has
 
been
 
disabled
 
by
 
the
 
installer
 
for
 
testing,
 
the
 
sounder
 
disabled
 
icon
 
appears.
 
It
 
also
 
flashes
 
to
 
indicate
 
silent
 
arming.
Low Backup Battery
Figure 38
Low Backup Battery
If
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
backup
 
battery
 
tests
 
low,
 
the
 
low
 
backup
 
battery
 
icon
 
appears.
Test Mode
Figure 39
Test M o de
This
 
icon
 
displays
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
in
 
Walk
 
Test
 
mode.
Touch Screen Keypad Traffic
Figure 40
Touch Screen Keypad Traffic
An
 
up
 
arrow
 
indicates
 
the
 
panel
 
is
 
sending
 
information
 
to
 
the
 
touch
 
screen
 
keypad
 
(if
 
installed).
 
A
 
down
 
arrow
 
indicates
 
the
 
touch
 
screen
 
keypad
 
is
 
sending
 
information
 
to
 
panel.
Cell Radio
Figure 41
Cell Radio
If
 
the
 
option
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
installed,
 
the
 
Cell
 
Radio
 
icon
 
appears
 
while
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
receiving
 
Over

the

Air
 
(OTA)
 
firmware
 
updates.
Interior sensor open
Figure 42
Interior Sensor Open
If
 
an
 
interior
 
sensor
 
is
 
open
 
(or
 
a
 
motion
 
detector
 
has
 
just
 
been
 
activated)
 
this
 
icon
 
appears.
 
As
 
a
 
warning,
 
the
 
icon
 
flashes
 
during
 
arming.
A
Status
 
Bar
B
Status
 
Icons Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
29
Programming Navigation
When
 
the
 
installer
 
is
 
using
 
the
 
System
 
Configuration
 
menus,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
present
 
each
 
programming
 
question
 
sequentially.
 
Most
 
programming
 
questions
 
have
 
a
 
single
 
numeric
 
value
 
response
 
or
 
a
 
simple
 
enabled/
disabled
 
selection.
 
Some
 
programming
 
questions
 
have
 
sub

options
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
set.
 
These
 
sub

options
 
are
 
displayed
 
for
 
the
 
question
 
selected
 
and
 
can
 
be
 
accessed
 
through
 
navigation
 
keys
 
on
 
the
 
display.
Navigation Arrows
& Go To Button
The
 
programming
 
question
 
screens
 
display
 
up,
 
down,
 
left,
 
and
 
right
 
navigation
 
arrows.
 
Use
 
these
 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
programming
 
questions
 
and
 
to
 
select
 
sub

options.
Tap
 
the
 
Go
 
To
 
button
 
and
 
then
 
enter
 
a
 
two
 
(2)

digit
 
code
 
to
 
jump
 
directly
 
to
 
a
 
programming
 
question.
 
See
 
“Programming
 
Question
 
Table”
 
on
 
page
 
32.
 
The
 
Go
 
To
 
button
 
changes
 
to
 
Cancel
 
when
 
waiting
 
for
 
you
 
to
 
enter
 
a
 
question
 
number.
 
Tap
 
Cancel
 
to
 
back
 
out.
Figure 43
Navigation Arrows & Go To Button
Questions without Sub-Options
Most
 
of
 
the
 
programming
 
questions
 
do
 
not
 
have
 
sub

options.
 
They
 
navigate
 
as
 
follows.
 
Questions
 
without
 
sub

options
 
do
 
not
 
display
 
a
 
Skip
 
button.
Figure 44
Questions without Sub-options
•The
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows
 
select
 
the
 
next
 
or
 
previous
 
programming
 
question.
•The
 ← 
and
 → 
arrows
 
choose
 
values
 
for
 
the
 
ques
Ɵ
on
 
or
 
move
 
the
 
cursor
 
left
 
and
 
right
 
along
 
the
 
white
 
data
 
entry
 
field.
Questions with Sub-Options
Some
 
of
 
the
 
programming
 
questions
 
have
 
sub

options.
 
They
 
navigate
 
as
 
follows.
 
Questions
 
with
 
sub

options
 
display
 
a
 
Skip
 
button
 
during
 
the
 
question.
 
The
 
Skip
 
button
 
advances
 
to
 
the
 
next
 
programming
 
question/section.
•The
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows
 
select
 
the
 
next
 
or
 
previous
 
programming
 
sub

question.
•The
 ← 
and
 → 
arrows
 
choose
 
values
 
for
 
the
 
ques
Ɵ
on
 
or
 
move
 
the
 
cursor
 
left
 
and
 
right
 
along
 
the
 
white
 
data
 
entry
 
field.
Figure 45
Questions with Sub-options
Questions with Data Entry
Some
 
of
 
the
 
programming
 
questions
 
require
 
entering
 
numeric
 
or
 
alphabetic
 
data.
 
For
 
devices
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
named,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
contains
 
a
 
large
 
vocabulary
 
with
 
words
 
to
 
choose
 
from.
 
See
 
"Voice
 
Descriptors"
 
on
 
page
 
38.
 
•Tap
 
Insert
 
to
 
display
 
the
 
first
 
word
 
in
 
the
 
Voice
 
Descriptors
 
list.
 
Use
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
word
 
list,
 
or
 
enter
 
the
 
corresponding
 
three
 
(3)

digit
 
code.
 
See
 
"Voice
 
Descriptors"
 
on
 
page
 
38
.
 
•Tap
 
Backspace
 
to
 
move
 
the
 
cursor
 
to
 
the
 
left
 
and
 
delete
 
one
 
(1)
 
character
 
at
 
a
 
time.
•Tap
 
Delete
 
to
 
delete
 
one
 
character
 
to
 
the
 
right
 
of
 
the
 
cursor
 
or
 
any
 
characters
 
that
 
are
 
highlighted.
•Tap
 
Forward
 
to
 
highlight
 
the
 
next
 
word
 
in
 
a
 
multi

word
 
data
 
field.
•Tap
 
Back
 
to
 
highlight
 
the
 
previous
 
word
 
in
 
a
 
multi

word
 
data
 
field.
 
The
 
Back
 
button
 
displays
 
the
 
previous
 
screen
 
in
 
some
 
cases.
•Tap
 
Shift
 
to
 
reveal
 
alternate
 
characters
 
on
 
the
 
keypad
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
for
 
data
 
entry.
Figure 46
Questions with Data Entry Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
30
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Additional Buttons
Depending
 
on
 
the
 
programming
 
question,
 
additional
 
buttons
 
may
 
be
 
displayed
 
on
 
screen:
•Tap
 
Esc
 
(Escape)
 
to
 
“undo”
 
the
 
previous
 
action.
 
This
 
is
 
useful
 
when
 
you
 
want
 
to
 
restore
 
the
 
previous
 
value
 
for
 
the
 
question
 
or
 
sub

question.
•Tap
 
Sum
 
(Summary)
 
to
 
reveal
 
a
 
summary
 
of
 
the
 
values
 
stored
 
for
 
the
 
question
 
and
 
sub

options.
•Tap
 
End
 
to
 
reveal
 
a
 
summary
 
of
 
the
 
values
 
stored
 
for
 
the
 
entire
 
Control
 
Panel
 
memory.
•Tap
 
Learn
 
to
 
set
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
receive
 
a
 
sensor’s
 
serial
 
number
 
during
 
programming.
•Tap
 
Paste
 
to
 
repeat
 
the
 
last
 
sensor
 
serial
 
number
 
entered.
•Tap
 
Exit
 
to
 
exiting
 
the
 
programming
 
module.
Figure 47
Other Buttons Displayed Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
31
Programming Outline
Each
 
system
 
installed
 
will
 
require
 
programming.
 
Most
 
installations
 
being
 
performed
 
by
 
the
 
professional
 
alarm
 
installer
 
for
 
a
 
specific
 
organization
 
will
 
have
 
common
 
values
 
set
 
in
 
every
 
Control
 
Panel
 
that
 
is
 
reporting
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
Other
 
programming
 
values,
 
such
 
as
 
the
 
account
 
number
 
and
 
sensor
 
setup,
 
may
 
be
 
unique
 
for
 
each
 
ins
tallation.
Use
 
the
 
following
 
outline
 
to
 
guide
 
you
 
through
 
the
 
installation
 
process.
 
Understanding
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
programming
 
structure
 
will
 
help
 
to
 
save
 
time
 
during
 
each
 
installation.
At
 
this
 
stage
 
the
 
following
 
should
 
be
 
already
 
completed:
•All
 
hardwired
 
sensors
 
installed
•All
 
wi

reless
 
sensors
 
installed
• Control
 
Pa
nel
 
mounted,
 
connected,
 
and
 
powered
 
up
1
At
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
tap
 
the
 
system
 
logo
 
in
 
the
 
lower
 
right
 
corner.
Figure 48
The Home Screen
NOTE:
You
 
can
 
also
 
tap
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
button
 
from
 
the
 
system’s
 
Toolbox
 
(3
 
of
 
3)
 
screen.
 
2
Enter
 
the
 
installer
 
code
 
(the
 
default
 
installer
 
code
 
is
 
1561)
 
in
 
the
 
Enter
 
Your
 
Code
 
to
 
Access
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
screen.
3
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox,
 
tap
 
System
 
Configuration
.
 
Then
 
begin
 
the
 
"RF
 
Se

nsor
 
Programming
 
Questions"
 
on
 
page
 
42.
4
After
 
programming
 
all
 
of
 
the
 
required
 
sensors
 
into
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
tap
 
End
,
 
then
 
Exit
,
 
to
 
save
 
the
 
changes.
5
After
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
restarts,
 
tap
 
Security
 
>
 
Menu
 
>
 
Toolbox
.
6
When
 
prompted,
 
enter
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code.
 
The
 
default
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
is
 
1111.
 
7
Tap
 
the
 
User
 
Management
 
button
 
and
 
then
 
setup
 
the
 
user
 
codes.
 
Be
 
sure
 
to
 
set
 
up
 
the
 
Duress
 
Code
 
as
 
User
 
#8.
 
Tap
 
Back
 
when
 
finished.
8
Tap
 
Brightness/Volume
 
and
 
set
 
the
 
levels
 
for
 
the
 
installation.
9
The
 
volume
 
setting
 
does
 
not
 
affect
 
the
 
volume
 
of
 
alarm
 
sounds.
10
Tap
 → 
to
 
view
 
the
 
second
 
toolbox
 
screen.
11
Tap
 
Back
 
Light
 
Timeout
 
and
 
set
 
the
 
display
 
lighting
 
timeout.
12
Tap
 
Set
 
Date
 
and
 
Set
 
Time
 
and
 
set
 
the
 
calendar
 
and
 
clock.
 
If
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
installed,
 
the
 
date
 
and
 
time
 
sets
 
automatically.
13
Press
 
the
 
 
button
 
to
 
return
 
to
 
the
 
Home
 
screen.
After
 
co

mpleting
 
all
 
setup
 
and
 
programming
 
tasks,
 
refer
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
User
 
Guide
 
for
 
information
 
about
 
operating
 
the
 
system.
 
Check
 
off
 
the
 
programmed
 
options
 
for
 
the
 
system
 
in
 
the
 
User
 
Guide
.
NOTE:
Ins

truct
 
the
 
end
 
user
 
about
 
proper
 
system
 
operations,
 
and
 
leave
 
the
 
User
 
Guide
 
at
 
the
 
installation
 
site
 
for
 
reference.
ANSI/SIA CP-01 Compliance
Several
 
programmable
 
options
 
have
 
the
 
defaults
 
pre

set
 
to
 
provide
 
compliance
 
with
 
the
 
American
 
National
 
Standards
 
Institutes/Security
 
Industry
 
Association
 
CP

01
 
Control
 
Panel
 
Standard
.
 
The
 
table
 
below
 
details
 
the
 
settings
 
that
 
comply
 
with
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
and
 
permanently
 
programmed
 
into
 
the
 
Console.
 
The
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
settings
 
documented
 
in
 
the
 
table
 
be

low
 
cannot
 
be
 
changed:
Programming
Questions
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
Setting
Range
Q1>
 
Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 

(1)
 
Enabled
Q2
 
>
 
Q:
 
Select
 
Wired
 
Sen

sor
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 

(1)
 
Enabled
Q5
 
Enter
 
Exit
 
Delay,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(45

120)
60
 
Seconds
45

120
 
Seconds
Q6
 
Enter
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1,
 
in
 
seconds
 
(45

120)
30
 
Seconds
30

240
 
Seconds
Q7
 
Enter
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
2,
 
in
 
seconds
 
(45

120)
45
 
Seconds
30

240
 
Seconds
Q10
 
Enter
 
Call
 
Waiting
 
Disable
 
Code
 
(0

6
 
digits)
No
 
Default
 
Code 0

6
 
Digits
Q20
 
Select
 
Swinger
 
Shut

down
 
Count
 
(1
 
to
 
6)
(2)
 
Two
 
Trips
1

6
 
Trips
Q26
 
Select
 
Auto
 
Stay
 

(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 

(1)
 
Enabled
Q27
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
Restart
 

(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 

(1)
 
Enabled
Q31
 
Enter
 
Cancel
 
Time,
 
in
 
Minutes
 
(5

255)
5
 
Minutes
6

254
 
Minutes
Q32
 
Select
 
Cancel

Display
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 

(1)
 
Enabled
Q35
 
Select
 
Abort
 
Win

dow
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
30
 
Seconds
15
 
to
 
45
 
Seconds
Q78
 
Select
 
Output
(11)
 
Follows
 
Internal
 
Sounder
 
Alarm
NOTE:
 
See
 
"Q78:
 
Output"
 
on
 
page
 
61 32
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Programming Question Table
Q#
Programming
 
Question/Sub

Question
Default
 
Setting
Q1
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
(01

48,63

74)
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Type
(00)
 
Unused
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Type
Varies
 
by
 
RF
 
sensor
 
type

Only
 
shown
 
for
 
some
 
sensor
 
types
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
(0000)
 
Other
Enter
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Other
 
Equipment
 
Code
 
(0

9999)
0
NOTE:
 
Only
 
shown
 
if
 
(0000)
 
Other
 
is
 
selected
 
as
 
the
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
Enter
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Serial
 
Number
 
(7
 
digits)
0000000
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Age
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
New
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Loop
 
Number
 
(1
 
to
 
3)
Varies
 
with
 
sensor
 
model
 
selected
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
(1)
 
Enabled‡
(2)
 
Disabled
 
(for
 
Fire
 
and
 
CO
 
only)
Construct
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
No
 
Default
 
Setting
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Reports
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Supervised
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Chime
 
(0
 
to
 
13)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q2
Select
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
(1
 
to
 
2)
Select
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Type
(00)
 
Unused
Enter
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
Select
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Age
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
New
Select
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Normal
 
State
 
(0
 
to
 
3)
(0)
 
Not
 
Used
Select
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled‡
Construct
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
‡No
 
default
Select
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Reports
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Select
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Chime
 
(0
 
to
 
13)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q3
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
(1
 
to
 
8)
 
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
Used
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Unused
 
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
 
(0000)
(0000)
 
Other
 
Enter
 
Fob
 
#
 
Other
 
Equipment
 
Code
 
(0
 
to
 
9999)
0
NOTE:
 
Only
 
shown
 
when
 
(0000)
 
other
 
is
 
selected
 
as
 
the
 
Fob
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
 
Enter
 
Fob
 
#
 
Serial
 
Number
 
(7
 
digits)
0000000
 
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Age
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
New
 
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0
 
to
 
4)
(0)
 
Disabled
 
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
Key
 
2
 
Can
 
Disarm
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
 
Construct
 
Fob
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
Keyfob
 
#
 
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
Arm
 
No
 
Delay
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
 
Select
 
Fob
 
#
 
Key
 
4
 
Output
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q4
Select
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
(1
 
to
 
4)
Select
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Used
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Unused
Select
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
(0000)
 
Other
Enter
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Other
 
Equipment
 
Code
 
(0
 
to
 
9999)
0
NOTE:
 
Only
 
shown
 
if
 
(0000)
 
Other
 
is
 
selected
 
as
 
the
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
Enter
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Serial
 
Number
 
(7
 
digits)
0000000
Select
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Emergency
 
Age
 
(01)
(0)
 
New
Select
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Emergency
 
Keys
 
(01)
(1)
 
Enabled
Construct
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
Keypad
 
#
Q5
Enter
 
Exit
 
Delay,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(45
 
to
 
120)
60
 
seconds

Q6
Enter
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(30
 
to
 
240)
30
 
seconds

Q7
Enter
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
2,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(30
 
to
 
240)
45
 
seconds

Q8
Select
 
Dialer
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
disabled
Q9
Enter
 
Dialing
 
Prefix
 
(0
 
to
 
4
 
digits)
No
 
default
Q10
Enter
 
Call
 
Waiting
 
Disable
 
Code
 
(0
 
to
 
6
 
digits)
No
 
default

Q11
Enter
 
CS
 
#1
 
Phone
 
Number
 
(0
 
to
 
25
 
digits)
No
 
default
Q12
Enter
 
CS
 
#1
 
Account
 
Number
 
(4
 
digits)
No
 
default
Q13
Select
 
Two

Way
 
Voice
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(1)
 
Stay
 
Online
Q14
Select
 
Silent
 
Panic/Burglary
 
Listen
 
Only
 
(1
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q15
Select
 
Dialing
 
Type
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Touch
 
Tone
Q16
Select
 
Police
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(1)
 
Audible
Q17
Select
 
Fire
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Audible
Q18
Select
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Audible
Q19
Select
 
Quick
 
Arming
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q20
Select
 
Swinger
 
Shutdown
 
Count
 
(1
 
to
 
6)
(2)
 
Two
 
Trips
‡ Programming Question Table
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
33
Q21
Select
 
Siren
 
Supervision
 
Time
 
(0
 
to
 
3)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q22
Enter
 
CS
 
Lack
 
of
 
Usage
 
Notification
 
Time,
 
in
 
Days
 
(0

255)
7
 
Days
Q23
Enter
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Time
 
(0

255)
30
 
Minutes
Q24
Select
 
Radio
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q25
Select
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Reports
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q26
Select
 
Auto
 
Stay
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled

Q27
Select
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
Restart
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled

Q28
Select
 
Quick
 
Exit
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q29
Enter
 
Periodic
 
Test,
 
in
 
Days
 
(0

255)
30
 
Days
Q31
Enter
 
Cancel
 
Time,
 
in
 
Minutes
 
(5

255)
5
 
Minutes

Q32
Select
 
Cancel
 
Display
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled

Q33
Select
 
Cross
 
Sensor
 
47

48
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q34
Enter
 
Cross
 
Sensor
 
Timeout,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
(10

120)
10
 
Seconds
Q35
Select
 
Abort
 
Window
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(1)
 
30
 
Seconds

Q36
Select
 
Burglary
 
Bell
 
Cutoff
 
(0
 
to
 
4)
(0)
 
4
 
Minutes
Q37
Select
 
Fire
 
Bell
 
Cutoff
 
(0
 
to
 
4)
(0)
 
4
 
Minutes
Q38
Enter
 
Time
 
to
 
Detect
 
AC
 
Loss,
 
in
 
Minutes
 
(1

30)
10
 
Minutes
Q39
Select
 
Random
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Report
 
Time
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q40
Enter
 
CS
 
#2
 
Phone
 
Number
 
(0

25
 
digits)
No
 
Default
Q41
Enter
 
CS
 
#2
 
Account
 
Number
 
(4
 
digits)
No
 
Default
Q42
Select
 
Remote
 
Control
 
Phone
 
(0
 
to
 
3)
(3)
 
Data
 
and
 
Voice
Q43
Enter
 
Installer
 
Code
 
(4
 
digits)
1561
Q44
Select
 
Lock
 
Installer
 
Programming
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q45
Select
 
Lock
 
Default
 
Programming
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(0)
 
Default
 
All
Q46
Select
 
Trouble
 
Doesn’t
 
Sound
 
at
 
Night
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
*(1)
 
Enabled
Q47
Select
 
Troubles
 
Resound
 
After
 
Holdoff
 
(0
 
to
 
7)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q48
Enter
 
Download
 
CSID
 
(6
 
digits)
000000
Q49
Select
 
Programming
 
Mode
 
Entry
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q50
Select
 
Trouble
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q51
Select
 
Manual
 
Bypass
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q52
Select
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q53
Select
 
System
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q54
Select
 
RF
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q55
Select
 
Opening
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q56
Select
 
Closing
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q57
Select
 
Alarm
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q58
Select
 
Trouble
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q59
Select
 
Bypass
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q60
Select
 
AC
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q61
Select
 
System
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q62
Select
 
RF
 
Low
 
Battery
 
Restore
 
Reports
 
to
 
CS
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q63
Select
 
Phone
 
Fail
 
Detect
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q64
Select
 
Smart
 
Test
 
Reports
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q65
Select
 
RF
 
Jam
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q66
Select
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q67
Select
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
Start
 
Month
 
(01
 
to
 
12)
(03)
 
March
Q68
Select
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
Start
 
Sunday
 
(1
 
to
 
7)
(2)
 
2nd
Q69
Select
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
End
 
Month
 
(01
 
to
 
12)
(11)
 
November
Q70
Select
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
End
 
Sunday
 
(1
 
to
 
7)
(1)
 
1st
Q71
Select
 
System
 
Tamper
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q72
Select
 
Quick
 
Bypass
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q73
Select
 
Disarming
 
Keyfob
 
After
 
Alarm
 
Alert
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q74
Select
 
Keyfob
 
Arm/Disarm
 
Confirmation
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q75
Select
 
Auto
 
Unbypass
 
for
 
Manual
 
Bypass
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q76
Select
 
Force
 
Bypass
 
Reports
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q77
Select
 
Event
 
Log
 
(0
 
to
 
3)
(3)
 
All
 
Events
Q78
Select
 
Output
 
(00

12)
(11)
 
Follows
 
Internal
 
Sounder
 
Alarm

Q79
Select
 
Z

Wave
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
3)
(3)
 
Enabled
 
with
 
Local
 
Rules
Q80
Select
 
Z

Wave
 
Switches
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q81
Select
 
Z

Wave
 
Thermostats
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q82
Select
 
Z

Wave
 
Door
 
Locks
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Q83
Select
 
Temperature
 
Display
 
Units
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Degrees
 
Fahrenheit
Select
 
date
 
and
 
time
 
format
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(0)
 
MM

DD

YY
 
H:MM
 
AM/PM
Q#
Programming
 
Question/Sub

Question
Default
 
Setting Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
34
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control

 
Indicates
 
the
 
default
 
se
ƫ
ng
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance
*
 
To
 
comply
 
with
 
UL
 
985:Household
 
Fire
 
Warning
 
System
 
Units
,
 
the
 
setting
 
for
 
Q46:
 
Select
 
Trouble
 
Doesn’t
 
Sound
 
at
 
Night
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
**
 
To
 
comply
 
with
 
UL
 
1610:
 
Central

Station
 
Burglar

Alarm
 
Units
,
 
Q96and
 
Q97
 
must
 
beset
 
to
 
(1)
 
enabled.
 
UL
 
1610
 
compliance
 
also
 
requires
 
that
 
Q91:
 
Select
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
1
.
 
Select
 
monetary
 
symbol
 
(0
 
to
 
8)
(0)
 
$
Q84
Select
 
Services
 
Require
 
Master
 
Code
(0)
 
Disabled
Q85
Select
 
Master
 
User
 
Access
 
to
 
Z

Wave
 
Toolbox
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q86
Select
 
Disable
 
Siren
 
After
 
Two

Way
 
Audio
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q87
Select
 
Keyfob/Remote
 
Arming
 
Mode
 
on
 
System
 
Not
 
Ready
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(0)
 
Auto

Bypass
 
with
 
Zone
 
Participation
 
on
 
Restore
Q88
Select
 
Z

Wave
 
Siren
 
Mode
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Sound
 
for
 
Burglary
 
and
 
Fire/CO
Q89
Select
 
Allow
 
Backlight
 
Always
 
On
 
(Demo
 
Mode)
(0)
 
Disabled
Q90
Select
 
Energy
 
Feature
 
(0
 
to
 
2)
(0)
 
Disabled
 
and
 
Hidden
Q91
Select
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
Varies
 
by
 
Supplier**
Q92
Select
 
Network
 
Device
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
none
Network
 
Device
 
ID
 
(Read

Only)
0
NOTE:
 
Only
 
appears
 
if
 
(1)
 
Go!Bridge
 
is
 
selected
 
in
 
Q92
 
Select
 
Network
 
Device
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
Select
 
Configuration
 
Source
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
DHCP
If
 
(0)
 
DHCP
 
is
 
selected
 
in
 
Select
 
Configuration
 
Source
 
(0
 
to
 
1),
 
the
 
following
 
sub

questions
 
appear
:
Select
 
Port
 
#
 
(1
 
to
 
8)
(1)
 
Port
 
1
NOTE:
 
This
 
option
 
is
 
automatically
 
selected
 
if
 
you
 
choose
 
(0)
 
DHCP
 
in
 
the
 
previous
 
question.
 
Typically,
 
you
 
will
 
skip
 
this
 
question
 
unless
 
additional
 
programming
 
is
 
required.
Select
 
Used
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(0)
 
Disabled
NOTE:
 
Typically,
 
you
 
will
 
skip
 
this
 
question
 
unless
 
additional
 
programming
 
is
 
required.
Enter
 
Port
 
Value
 
(0

65535)
0
NOTE:
 
Only
 
appears
 
if
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
is
 
selected
 
in
 
Select
 
Used
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
Enter
 
Port
 
Forward
 
IP
 
Address
000.000.000.000
NOTE:
 
Only
 
appears
 
if
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
is
 
selected
 
in
 
Select
 
Used
 
(0
 
to
 
1).
NOTE:
 
Typically,
 
you
 
will
 
accept
 
the
 
default
 
IP
 
address
 
value
 
that
 
appears.
If
 
(1)
 
Static
 
is
 
selected
 
in
 
Select
 
Configuration
 
Source
 
(0
 
to
 
1),
 
the
 
following
 
sub

questions
 
appear
Enter
 
Device
 
IP
 
Address
Enter
 
Gateway
 
IP
 
Address
Enter
 
Subnet
 
Mask
Q93
Enter
 
Broadband
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Time
 
(1

255)
30
Q94
Select
 
Broadband
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Causes
 
Trouble
 
(0
 
to
 
1) (1)
 
Enabled
Q95
Select
 
Broadband
 
Network
 
Failure
 
Reports
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled
Q96
Select
 
send
 
report
 
3
 
times
 
on
 
panel
 
tamper
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
(1)
 
Enabled**
Q97
Select
 
sound
 
on
 
normal
 
closing
 
acknowledgment
 
(0
 ‐ 
to

1)
(1)
 
Enabled**
Q#
Programming
 
Question/Sub

Question
Default
 
Setting Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
35
Zone Numbering
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
supports
 
60
 
wireless
 
protection
 
zones.
 
When
 
programming
 
zones,
 
keep
 
the
 
following
 
numbering
 
ranges
 
in
 
mind:
Zones Descriptions
1

48
Wireless
 
Zones
47

48
Wireless
 
Cross

Sensor
 
Zone
49

50
Wired
 
Zones
51

58
Keyfobs
59

62
Keypads
63

74
Wireless
 
Zones
92
Duress
95
Fire
96
Medical
99
Police
 
Panic 36
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Sensor Types (Zones)
Each
 
sensor
 
(wireless
 
or
 
wired)
 
installed
 
in
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
programmed
 
to
 
a
 
specific
 
sensor
 
number
 
and
 
sensor
 
type
 
(zone).
 
The
 
sensor
 
number
 
identifies
 
the
 
specific
 
sensor
 
when
 
it
 
is
 
displayed
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
recorded
 
in
 
the
 
event
 
log,
 
or
 
reported
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
This
 
allows
 
pin

point
 
information
 
about
 
any
 
sensor
 
in
 
the
 
system.
The
 
sensor
 
type
 
determines
 
how
 
and
 
when
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
responds
 
to
 
signals
 
from
 
the
 
sensor.
 
Some
 
sensors
 
are
 
armed
 
all
 
the
 
time,
 
others
 
are
 
armed
 
only
 
in
 
certain
 
arming
 
levels,
 
some
 
cause
 
Central
 
Station
 
Reports
 
anytime
 
they
 
are
 
activated.
 
The
 
sensor’s
 
type,
 
along
 
with
 
other
 
programming
 
options,
 
determine
 
this.
Sensor
 
Type
 
(Zone)
Description
(00)
 
Unused
This
 
is
 
the
 
setting
 
for
 
unused
 
sensor
 
numbers
 
that
 
do
 
not
 
have
 
a
 
sensor
 
programmed
 
into
 
them.
 
No
 
system
 
action
 
occurs
 
at
 
any
 
time
 
from
 
this
 
sensor
 
type.
(01)
 
Exit/Entry
 
1This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
reserved
 
for
 
doors
 
that
 
are
 
used
 
for
 
exit
 
and
 
entry
 
of
 
the
 
protected
 
premises.
 
When
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
the
 
Stay
 
or
 
Away
 
mode,
 
the
 
exit
 
delay
 
timer
 
starts.
 
There
 
is
 
an
 
exit
 
delay
 
regardless
 
of
 
whether
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
Stay
 
or
 
Away
 
mode.
 
When
 
the
 
exit
 
delay
 
timer
 
expires,
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
fully
 
armed.
With
 
the
 
system
 
fully
 
armed,
 
when
 
this
 
type
 
of
 
sensor
 
is
 
triggered,
 
the
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1
 
timer
 
starts.
 
The
 
system
 
must
 
be
 
disarmed
 
before
 
the
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1
 
timer
 
expires,
 
or
 
an
 
alarm
 
will
 
occur.
If
 
the
 
entry
 
delay
 
timer
 
is
 
turned
 
OFF
 
during
 
arming,
 
the
 
exit/entry
 
delay
 
sensors
 
will
 
act
 
as
 
non

delayed
 
instant
 
sensors
 
at
 
the
 
end
 
of
 
exit
 
delay.
(02)
 
Exit/Entry
 
2
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
operates
 
the
 
same
 
as
 
the
 
Exit/Entry
 
1
 
sensor
 
type
 
except
 
it
 
starts
 
the
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
2
 
timer.
 
This
 
provides
 
a
 
method
 
of
 
having
 
a
 
longer
 
entry
 
delay
 
on
 
certain
 
openings,
 
such
 
as
 
a
 
garage
 
door,
 
to
 
provide
 
the
 
end
 
user
 
more
 
time
 
to
 
disarm
 
the
 
system.
(03)
 
Perimeter
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
for
 
perimeter
 
doors
 
and
 
windows
 
that
 
will
 
not
 
be
 
used
 
to
 
enter
 
or
 
exit
 
the
 
protected
 
premises
 
while
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed.
 
An
 
instant
 
alarm
 
will
 
occur
 
when
 
this
 
type
 
of
 
sensor
 
is
 
triggered
 
with
 
the
 
system
 
armed
 
in
 
either
 
the
 
Stay
 
or
 
Away
 
mode.
(04)
 
Interior
 
Follower
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
for
 
interior
 
sensors
 
such
 
as
 
motion
 
detector,
 
interior
 
doors,
 
and
 
other
 
sensors
 
that
 
detect
 
human
 
presence
 
inside
 
the
 
protected
 
premises.
 
This
 
type
 
of
 
sensor
 
is
 
called
 
a
 
“follower”
 
due
 
to
 
its
 
action
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
the
 
Away
 
mode.
 
After
 
the
 
exit
 
delay
 
expires
 
and
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed,
 
if
 
an
 
interior
 
follower
 
sensor
 
is
 
triggered,
 
an
 
instant
 
alarm
 
will
 
occur.
 
If
 
an
 
exit/entry
 
delay
 
sensor
 
is
 
triggered
 
first,
 
the
 
interior
 
follower
 
sensor
 
will
 
also
 
be
 
delayed.
Interior
 
follower
 
sensors
 
are
 
always
 
bypassed
 
and
 
not
 
active
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
Stay
 
mode.
 
This
 
allows
 
the
 
premises
 
to
 
be
 
occupied
 
while
 
still
 
protecting
 
the
 
perimeter.
(05)
 
Day
 
Zone
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
the
 
same
 
as
 
a
 
perimeter
 
zone,
 
except
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed,
 
a
 
violation
 
displays
 
a
 
trouble
 
alert
 
on
 
the
 
Console’s
 
display.
 
Common
 
uses
 
for
 
this
 
sensor
 
type
 
are
 
protection
 
of
 
sensitive
 
areas
 
that
 
require
 
notification
 
and
 
possibly
 
a
 
Central
 
Station
 
trouble
 
report,
 
but
 
not
 
an
 
alarm
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed.
(06)
 
24

Hour
 
Silent
 
Alarm
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
active
 
independent
 
of
 
the
 
system
 
arming
 
status.
 
The
 
code
 
for
 
silent
 
panic
 
is
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station,
 
but
 
for
 
safety,
 
there
 
are
 
no
 
visual
 
or
 
audible
 
indications
 
locally
 
that
 
this
 
sensor
 
type
 
has
 
been
 
triggered.
(07)
 
24

Hour
 
Audible
 
Alarm This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
continuously
 
armed
 
24

hours
 
a
 
day.
 
A
 
sensor
 
programmed
 
to
 
this
 
type
 
will
 
trigger
 
a
 
local
 
alarm
 
and
 
the
 
bell
 
output
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
mode
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
in.
 
Typical
 
use
 
would
 
be
 
an
 
audible
 
panic
 
alarm.
(08)
 
24

Hour
 
Auxiliary
 
Alarm
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
continuously
 
armed
 
24

hours
 
a
 
day.
 
A
 
sensor
 
programmed
 
to
 
this
 
type
 
will
 
trigger
 
an
 
alarm
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
mode
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
in.
 
The
 
bell
 
output
 
will
 
not
 
activate,
 
but
 
the
 
local
 
sounder
 
will
 
continue
 
until
 
it’s
 
acknowledged
 
at
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
Typical
 
use
 
would
 
be
 
for
 
a
 
monitoring
 
device
 
such
 
as
 
a
 
flood
 
or
 
temperature
 
sensor.
 
There
 
is
 
no
 
time
 
out
 
for
 
the
 
internal
 
sounder,
 
it
 
will
 
continue
 
until
 
a
 
user
 
code
 
is
 
entered.
(09)
 
24

Hour
 
Fire
 
†This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
continuously
 
armed
 
24

hours
 
a
 
day.
 
A
 
sensor
 
programmed
 
to
 
this
 
type
 
will
 
trigger
 
the
 
local
 
alarm
 
fire
 
sounder
 
and
 
the
 
bell
 
output
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
mode
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
in.Typical
 
use
 
would
 
be
 
for
 
wireless
 
smoke
 
detectors.
 
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
always
 
active
 
and
 
cannot
 
be
 
bypassed.
(10)
 
Interior
 
with
 
Delay
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
operates
 
as
 
a
 
delayed
 
sensor
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
the
 
Away
 
mode,
 
and
 
when
 
triggered,
 
will
 
start
 
the
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1
 
timer.
 
If
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
Away
 
mode
 
with
 
no
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
(armed
 
instant),
 
this
 
sensor
 
type
 
will
 
trigger
 
an
 
instant
 
alarm.
If
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
Stay
 
mode
 
(or
 
Stay
 
mode
 
with
 
no
 
Entry
 
Delay
),
 
this
 
sensor
 
type
 
will
 
be
 
bypassed.
(14)
 
24

Hour
 
Carbon
 
Monoxide
 

This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
continuously
 
armed
 
24

hours
 
a
 
day.
 
A
 
sensor
 
programmed
 
to
 
this
 
type
 
will
 
trigger
 
the
 
local
 
alarm
 
pulse
 
sounder
 
and
 
the
 
bell
 
output
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
mode
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
in.
 
Typical
 
use
 
would
 
be
 
for
 
wireless
 
carbon
 
monoxide
 
detectors.
 
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
always
 
active
 
and
 
cannot
 
be
 
bypassed.
(16)
 
24

Hour
 
Fire
 
with
 
Veri
fi
ca
Ɵ
on
 

This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
continuously
 
armed
 
24

hours
 
a
 
day.
 
A
 
sensor
 
programmed
 
to
 
this
 
type
 
can
 
trigger
 
the
 
local
 
alarm
 
fire
 
sounder
 
and
 
the
 
bell
 
output
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
mode
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
in.
 
Typical
 
use
 
would
 
be
 
for
 
wireless
 
smoke
 
detectors.
 
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
always
 
active
 
and
 
cannot
 
be
 
bypassed.
For
 
verification,
 
this
 
sensor
 
type
 
must
 
be
 
violated
 
twice
 
in
 
two
 
(2)
 
minutes,
 
or
 
remain
 
violated
 
for
 
30
 
seconds.
 
If
 
any
 
other
 
fire
 
sensor
 
(verified
 
sensor
 
type
 
or
 
not)
 
violates
 
within
 
two
 
minutes,
 
both
 
sensors
 
will
 
cause
 
a
 
fire
 
alarm.
(23)
 
No
 
Response
 
Type
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
a
 
special
 
zone
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
monitored
 
for
 
activity
 
or
 
inactivity
 
by
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
It
 
does
 
not
 
affect
 
security
 
system
 
status.
(24)
 
Silent
 
Burglary
This
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
for
 
silent
 
triggering
 
the
 
burglary
 
alarm
 
with
 
perimeter
 
doors
 
and
 
windows
 
that
 
will
 
not
 
be
 
used
 
to
 
enter
 
or
 
exit
 
the
 
protected
 
premises
 
while
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
sounder
 
and
 
the
 
bell
 
output
 
will
 
not
 
activate.
An
 
instant
 
silent
 
alarm
 
will
 
occur
 
when
 
this
 
type
 
of
 
sensor
 
is
 
triggered
 
with
 
the
 
system
 
armed
 
in
 
either
 
the
 
Stay
 
or
 
Away
 
mode. Sensor Types (Zones)
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
37

 
Indicates
 
Sensor
 
types
 
that
 
are
 
not
 
allowed
 
for
 
hardwired
 
loops.
*
 
Sensor
 
Type
 
Reporting
 
is
 
only
 
supported
 
on
 
Alarm.com.
(32)
 
Remote
 
Device*
This
 
zone
 
type
 
is
 
selected
 
by
 
the
 
installer
 
when
 
pairing
 
the
 
panel
 
with
 
peripheral
 
devices
 
that
 
can
 
utilize
 
localized
 
troubles
 
(such
 
as
 
RF
 
jam,
 
low
 
battery,
 
tamper,
 
or
 
AC
 
loss
 
detected
 
by
 
the
 
peripheral
 
device).
 
This
 
sensor
 
is
 
continuously
 
active
 
and
 
will
 
cause
 
a
 
trouble
 
at
 
the
 
panel
 
for
 
all
 
problem
 
conditions.
 
When
 
the
 
panel
 
is
 
in
 
an
 
armed
 
state,
 
this
 
sensor
 
type
 
will
 
cause
 
an
 
alarm
 
for
 
TAMPER
 
and
 
RF
 
JAM.
 
All
 
trouble
 
conditions
 
will
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
monitoring
 
station
 
if
 
reporting
 
is
 
enabled
 
with
 
the
 
exception
 
of
 
AC
 
LOSS.
 
This
 
will
 
only
 
de
 
displayed
 
at
 
the
 
panel.
Sensor
 
Type
 
(Zone)
Description 38
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Voice Descriptors
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
includes
 
a
 
system
 
vocabulary.
 
When
 
programming
 
sensors
 
when
 
using
 
firmware
 
version
 
1.13,
 
you
 
can
 
use
 
the
 
codes
 
detailed
 
in
 
this
 
table:
Figure 49
List of Voice Descriptors
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
002
ABORT
041
CLOSET
003
AC
042
CODE
004
ACCESS
043
COMMUNICATIONS
005
ALARM
044
COMPUTER
006
AND
045
CONTROL
007
ANNOUNCEMENT
046
COOL
008
AREA
047
CRAWL
009
ARM
048
CURRENT
010
ARMED
049
DAY
011
ARMING
050
DEGREES
012
AT
051
DEN
013
ATTIC
052
DETECTOR
014
AUDIO
053
DIM
015
AUTO
054
DINING
016
AUTOMATION
055
DISARM
017
AUXILIARY
056
DISARMED
018
AWAY
57
DOCK
019
BABY'S
58
DOOR
020
BACK
O59
 
DOWNSTAIRS
021
BASEMENT
060
DRIVEWAY
022
BATHROOM
061
EAST
023
BATTERY
062
EIGHT
024
BEDROOM
063
EIGHTEEN
025
BONUS
064
EIGHTY
026
BREAK
065
ELECTRIC
027
BUTTON
066
ELEVEN
028
BYPASS
067
EMERGENCY
029
BYPASSED
068
ENTER
030
CABINET
069
ENTRANCE
031
CANCEL
070
ENTRY
032
CARBON
 
MONOXIDE
071
ERROR
033
CELLAR
072
EXERCISE
034
CELLULAR
073
EXIT
035
CELL
 
RADIO
074
EXIT
 
NOW
036
CENTER
075
EXTERIOR
037
CHECK
076
EXTERNAL
038
CHEST
077
FAILURE
039
CHILDREN'S
078
FAMILY
040
CHIME
079
FAN
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
080
FIFTEEN
119
INTRUSION
081
FIFTY
120
IS
082
FIRE
121
KEY
083
FIRE
 
ALERT
122
KEYFOB
084
FIRE
 
DETECTOR
123
KEYPAD
085
FIRST
124
KIDS
086
FIVE
125
KITCHEN
087
FLOOD
126
LAUNDRY
088
FLOOR
127
LEFT
089
FLUID
128
LEVEL
090
FOIL
129
LIBRARY
091
FOR
130
LIGHT
092
FORTY
131
LIGHTS
093
FOUR
132
LIQUOR
094
FOURTEEN
133
LIVING
095
FOURTH
134
LOADING
096
FREEZE
136
LOCK
097
FREEZER
136
LOFT
098
FRONT
137
LOW
099
FURNACE
138
MAIN
100
GAME
139
MAINTENANCE
101
GARAGE
140
MASTER
102
GAS
141
MEDICAL
103
GLASS
142
MEDICINE
104
GLASS
 
BREAK
143
MENU
105
GUEST
144
MIDDLE
106
GUN
145
MONITOR
107
HALL
146
MOTION
108
HALLWAY
147
MOTION
 
DETECTOR
109
HANGING
148
MUD
110
HANGUP
149
NINE
111
HEAT
150
NINETEEN
112
HIGH
151
NINETY
113
HOME
152
NORTH
114
HOUSE
153
NOT
115
ICE
154
NOT
 
READY
116
INSIDE
155
NO
 
DELAY
117
INSTANT
156
NO
 
ENTRY
 
DELAY
118
INTERIOR
157
NURSERY Voice Descriptors
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
39
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
158
OFF
197
SEVENTY
159
OFFICE
198
SHED
160
ON
199
SHOP
161
ONE
200
SIDE
162
ONE
 
HUNDRED
201
SILENT
163
OUTPUT
202
SIREN
164
OUTSIDE
203
SIX
165
PANEL
204
SIXTEEN
166
PANIC
205
SIXTY
167
PANTRY
206
SKYLIGHT
168
PATIO
207
SLIDING
169
PERIMETER
208
SMOKE
170
PHONE
 
LINE
209
SOUNDER
171
PLAY
210
SOUTH
172
POLICE
212
SPARE
173
POOL
213
STAIRS
174
POUND
214
STAR
175
POWER
215
STATUS
176
PRESS
216
STAY
177
PREVIOUS
217
STOP
178
PUMP
218
STORAGE
179
RADIO
219
STUDY
180
READY
220
SUMP
181
REAR
221
SUPERVISION
182
RELAY
222
SYSTEM
183
REMOTE
223
TAMPER
184
REPEAT
224
TEMPERATURE
185
RF
 
JAM
225
TEN
186
RIGHT
226
TERMINATED
187
ROOM
227
THERMOSTAT
188
SAFE
228
THIRD
189
SECOND
229
THIRTEEN
190
SECURITY
230
THIRTY
191
SENSOR
231
THREE
192
SENSORS
232
TO
193
SESSION
233
TOOL
194
SET
234
TRANSMITTED
195
SEVEN
235
TRANSMITTER
196
SEVENTEEN
236
TROUBLE
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
CODE
DESCRIPTOR
237
TURN
262
SERVICE
238
TWELVE
263
SUNROOM
239
TWENTY
264
WAREHOUSE
240
TWO
265
GATE
241
UNLOCK
266
APARTMENT
242
UPPER
267
FOYER
243
UPSTAIRS
268
TV
244
USER
269
VIDEO
245
UTILITY
270
PORCH
246
VALVE
271
CORNER
247
VOICE
272
BELL
248
WALL
273
BOY’S
249
WATER
274
CAMERA
250
WEST
275
CAVE
251
WINDOW
276
DAUGHTER’S
252
WIRELESS
277
DOORBELL
253
YARD
278
GIRL’S
254
ZERO
279
IMAGE
 
255
ZONE
280
IMAGE
 
SENSOR
256
BALCONY
281
MAN
257
COURTYARD
282
SON’S
258
DECK
283
SUN
259
DETACHED
284
THEATER
260
OVERHEAD
285
WING
261
REFRIGERATOR
286
SWITCH 40
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Equipment Codes
The
 
table
 
below
 
details
 
the
 
available
 
equipment
 
codes:
 
 
Code Description
(0000)
 
Other
(0470)
 
HW
 
R

D/W
 
“5818MNL”
(0475)
 
Existing
 
Glass
 
Break
 
Detector
(0491)
 
HW
 
Panic
 
Pendant
 
“5802MN2”
(0519)
 
HW
 
Glass
 
Break
 
“5853”
(0530)
 
HW
 
PIR
 
“5894PI”
(0533)
 
HW
 
PIR
 
“5890”
(0556)
 
Existing
 
Flood/Temp
 
Sensor
(0557)
 
HW
 
Heat
 
Sensor
 
“5809”
(0577)
 
Existing
 
Keyfob
 
Remote
(0589)
 
HW
 
Smoke
 
“5808W3”
(0609)
 
Existing
 
Motion
 
Detector
(0616)
 
Existing
 
Smoke
 
Detector
(0624)
 
HW
 
Flood
 
Sensor
 
“5821”
(0637)
 
HWD/W”5816”
(0655)
 
Existing
 
Door/Window
 
Contact
(0692)
 
Existing
 
CO
 
Detector
(0708)
 
Existing
 
Heat
 
Sensor
(0859)
 
CO1

345C
 
CO
 
Detector
 
(Canada)
(0860)
 
CO1

345
 
CO
 
Detector
 
(USA)
(0862)
 
2GIG
 
Thin
 
Door/Window
 
Contact
(0863)
 
2GIG
 
Recessed
 
Door
 
Contact
(0864)
 
2GIG
 
Glass
 
Break
 
Detector
(0866)
 
2GIG
 
4

Button
 
Keyfob
 
Remote
(0867)
 
2GIG
 
Wireless
 
Keypad
(0868)
 
2GIG
 
Panic
 
Button
 
Remote
(0869)
 
2GIG
 
PIR
 
with
 
Pet
 
Immunity
(0871)
 
SMKE1

345C
 
Smoke
 
Detector
 
(Canada)
(0872)
 
SMKE1

345
 
Smoke
 
Detector
 
(USA)
(0873)
 
2GIG
 
Takeover
 
Module
(0895)
 
SMTK2

345
 
GE
 
Smoke/Heat
 
Detector
 
(USA/Canada)
(1026)
 
2GIG
 
CO
 
Detector
(1058)
 
2GIG
 
Smoke
 
Detector
(1059)
 
2GIG

TS1
 
Wireless
 
Touchscreen
 
Keypad
(1061)
 
Tilt
 
Sensor
(1062)
2GIG
 
Tilt
 
Sensor
(1063)
 
2GIG
 
Doorbell
(1064)
2GIG
 
Bypass
 
Sensor
(1065)
2GIG
 
Flood
 
Sensor
(1067)
2GIG
 
Repeater
(1068)
2GIG
 
Translator
(9999)
 
Alarm.com
 
Image
 
Sensor Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
41
Installer Programming
Account Registration
Register
 
the
 
account
 
to
 
enroll
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
with
 
the
 
remote
 
service
 
provider’s
 
Central
 
Station.
Typically,
 
the
 
account
 
registration
 
data
 
is
 
created
 
with
 
the
 
service
 
installation
 
contract
 
and
 
then
 
stored
 
in
 
a
 
database
 
managed
 
by
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
The
 
data
 
includes
 
items
 
such
 
as
 
the
 
customer
 
name,
 
address,
 
and
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
telephone
 
number,
 
and
 
the
 
account
 
number
 
assigned
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
If
 
you
 
will
 
be
 
installing
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Go!Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator,
 
additional
 
registration
 
information
 
is
 
required.
 
For
 
details,
 
see
 
the
 
Installation
 
Instructions
 
included
 
with
 
the
 
Go!Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator.
 
Wireless (RF) Sensor Programming
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
with
 
up
 
to
 
60
 
RF
 
sensors
 
of
 
different
 
types.
 
In
 
addition
 
to
 
the
 
60
 
multi

purpose
 
RF
 
sensors,
 
you
 
can
 
also
 
program
 
eight
 
(8)
 
RF
 
remote
 
control
 
key
 
fobs
 
and
 
four
 
(4)
 
RF
 
remote
 
control
 
keypads
 
into
 
the
 
system.
RF
 
sensors
 
#
 
01

48
 
and
 
#63

74
 
report
 
as
 
wireless
 
zones
 
01

60.
 
Programming
 
questions
 
for
 
RF
 
sensor
 
programming
 
include:

Q1:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
Number
.
 
Select
 
sensor
 
number
 
01

48
 
or
 
63

74.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Type
.
 
Select
 
(01)
 
Exit/Entry
 
1
,
 
(02)
 
Exit/Entry
 
2
,
 
(03)
 
Perimeter
,
 
and
 
so
 
on.
 
For
 
options,
 
see
 
"Zone
 
Numbering"
 
on
 
page
 
35
.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Type
.
 
Some
 
sensor
 
types
 
ask
 
for
 
the
 
equipment
 
type,
 
others
 
do
 
not.
 
See
 
"Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Type"
 
on
 
page
 
43
.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
 
Select
 
the
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
equipment
 
code
 
for
 
the
 
sensor
 
model.
 
See
 
"Equipment
 
Codes"
 
on
 
page
 
40
.

Q:
 
Enter
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Other
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
 
If
 
you
 
select
 
(0000)
 
Other
 
in
 
the
 
previous
 
question,
 
you
 
must
 
enter
 
this
 
code.

Q:
 
Enter
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Serial
 
#
.
 
Enter
 
the
 
serial
 
number
 
(typically
 
a
 
label
 
on
 
the
 
sensor
 
or
 
its
 
packaging)
 
or
 
tap
 
Shift
 
then
 
Learn
 
on
 
the
 
panel.
 
Then
 
trip
 
the
 
sensor
 
to
 
transmit
 
the
 
serial
 
number
 
to
 
the
 
panel.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Age
.
 
Specify
 
whether
 
the
 
sensor
 
is
 
(0)
 
New
 
or
 
(1)
 
Existing
.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Loop
 
Number
.
 
Specify
 
the
 
appropriate
 
loop
 
number(s)
 
for
 
the
 
sensor.
 
See
 
"Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Loop
 
Number
 
(1
 
to
 
3)"
 
on
 
page
 
43
.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Dialer
 
Delay
.
 
Specify
 
whether
 
to
 
use
 
delayed
 
or
 
instant
 
digital
 
communicator
 
reports
 
for
 
the
 
sensor.
 
The
 
delay
 
time
 
is
 
set
 
on
 
the
 
Dialer
 
Abort
 
screen.

Q:
 
Construct
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
.
 
Specify
 
the
 
name
 
assigned
 
to
 
the
 
sensor
 
that
 
is
 
announced
 
if
 
this
 
feature
 
is
 
programmed.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Reports
.
 
Specify
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
whether
 
or
 
not
 
RF
 
sensors
 
trigger
 
a
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.

Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Supervised
.
 
Specify
 
whether
 
or
 
not
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
checks
 
for
 
status
 
reports
 
from
 
the
 
sensor.

Q:
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Chime
.
 
Select
 
voice
 
announcement
 
and
 
chime
 
options
 
for
 
the
 
sensor. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
42
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Q1: RF Sensor Programming Outline
Figure 50
RF Sensor Programming Outline
Scroll
 
between
 
op
Ɵ
ons
 
using
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrows.
 
Move
 
to
 
the
 
previous
 
or
 
next
 
prompt
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows.
1
To
 
program
 
another
 
sensor
 
tap
 
Next
.
2
To
 
exit
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
 
then
 
End
 
and
 
Exit
.
 
Upon
 
exit,
 
the
 
panel
 
takes
 
several
 
seconds
 
to
 
restart.
*Only
 
use

d
 
for
 
“other”
 
equipment
**Tap
 
Insert
 
for
 
each
 
word.
 
To
 
select
 
from
 
the
 
list,
 
you
 
can
 
use
 
the
 
keypad
 
or
 
tap
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows.
Summary of RF Sensor # Screen
After
 
setting
 
all
 
the
 
options
 
for
 
a
 
sensor,
 
the
 
RF
 
sensor
 
summary
 
screen
 
is
 
displayed.
 
The
 
screen
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
displayed
 
for
 
programmed
 
sensors
 
during
 
RF
 
sensor
 
program
 
editing
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 
Sum
 
button.
•While
 
pr
ogramming
 
each
 
RF
 
sensor
 
remember
 
that
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrow
 
bu
Ʃ
ons
 
step
 
through
 
each
 
of
 
the
 
RF
 
sensor
 
numbers.
•To
 
ret

urn
 
to
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Edit
 
Current
 
or
 
Edit
 
Next
.
•Tap
 
Sk

ip
 
to
 
go
 
to
 
question
 
number
 
Q2
 
(Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming).
 
See
 
"Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
44.
Figure 51
Summary of RF Sensor # Screen
RF Sensor Programming Questions
Q1: Select RF Sensor # (01-48, 63-74)
Up
 
to
 
60
 
wireless
 
RF
 
sensors
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
each
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
options
 
for
 
each
 
sensor
 
are
 
programmed
 
with
 
sub

option
 
questions.
1
Enter
 
the
 
RF
 
sensor
 
number
 
or
 
tap
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
select
 
it.
2
Program
 
the
 
sensor
 
details
 
by
 
using
 
the
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows
 
to
 
select
 
each
 
of
 
the
 
sub

options.
NOTE:
To
 
skip
 
Q1
 
an
d
 
jump
 
directly
 
to
 
Q2
 
for
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
.
Q: Select RF Sensor # Type
DEFAULT:
 
(00)
 
Unused
Answer
 
this
 
question
 
to
 
define
 
the
 
sensor
 
type
 
(zone).
 
Simply
 
enter
 
the
 
appropriate
 
code
 
(see
 
table
 
below)
 
or
 
tap
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
select
 
the
 
desired
 
zone.
In
 
the
 
table
 
below,
 
a
 
“Y”
 
indicates
 
the
 
sensor
 
type
 
can
 
be
 
assigned.
 
A
 
“N”
 
indicates
 
the
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
not
 
used,
 
an
d
 
an
 
asterisk
 
(*)
 
denotes
 
that
 
selecting
 
this
 
sensor
 
type
 
also
 
requires
 
you
 
to
 
answer
 
the
 
Q:
 
Select
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Type
 
question.
Sensor
 
Types
 
(Zone)
RF Wired
(00)
 
Unused
Y
Y
(01)
 
Exit/Entry
 
1
YY Installer Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
43
Q: Select RF Sensor # Equipment Type
DEFAULT:
 
Va
ries
 
by
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
Type
NOTE:
Som

e
 
sensor
 
types
 
(zones)
 
will
 
require
 
you
 
to
 
specify
 
an
 
equipment
 
type
 
selection,
 
which
 
affects
 
the
 
sensor’s
 
extended
 
reporting
 
code.
Simply
 
ent

er
 
the
 
appropriate
 
equipment
 
type
 
code
 
(see
 
table
 
below)
 
or
 
tap
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
select
 
the
 
appropriate
 
equipment
 
type.
 
The
 
table
 
below
 
shows
 
the
 
Equipment
 
Types
 
available
 
for
 
each
 
Sensor
 
Type
 
(Zone):
Q: Select RF Sensor # Equipment Code
DEFAULT:
 
(0000)
 
Oth
er
Select
 
the
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
equipment
 
code
 
that
 
corresponds
 
to
 
the
 
appropriate
 
sensor
 
model.
 
See
 
"Equipment
 
Codes"
 
on
 
page
 
40.
Q: Select RF Sensor # Other Equipment Code
NOTE:
This
 
su
b

question
 
is
 
only
 
displayed
 
if
 
(0000)
 
Other
 
is
 
selected
 
as
 
the
 
RF
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
Enter
 
the
 
eq

uipment
 
code
 
number
 
directly
 
on
 
the
 
keypad
 
for
 
the
 
RF
 
sensor.
 
Enter
 
“0”
 
if
 
the
 
new
 
equipment
 
code
 
is
 
unknown.
Q: Enter RF Sensor # Serial Number (7 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
0000000
RF
 
se
nsor
 
serial
 
numbers
 
can
 
be
 
manually
 
entered
 
or
 
automatically
 
transmitted
 
from
 
the
 
sensor
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.

Fo

r
 
manual
 
entry
.
 
Enter
 
the
 
sensor
 
number
 
that
 
was
 
logged
 
for
 
the
 
sensor
 
being
 
programmed.
 
Tap
 
Shift
 
to
 
access
 
alphabetic
 
characters.

Fo

r
 
automatic
 
entry
.
 
Tap
 
Shift
,
 
then
 
tap
 
Learn
 
to
 
place
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
into
 
learning
 
mode.
 
Then
 
trigger
 
the
 
RF
 
sensor.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
beep
 
four
 
(4)
 
times
 
and
 
learn
 
the
 
sensor’s
 
serial
 
number.
If
 
the
 
se

nsor
 
being
 
learned
 
is
 
already
 
in
 
memory,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
display
 
a
 
sensor
 
learning
 
failure
 
screen
 
when
 
the
 
programming
 
changes
 
are
 
being
 
saved.
For
 
certain
 
sensors
 
with
 
more
 
than
 
two
 
loops,
 
the
 
tamper
 
switch
 
must
 
be
 
used
 
to
 
send
 
a
 
signal
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
during
 
sensor
 
learning.
 
The
 
fir

st
 
press
 
of
 
the
 
tamper
 
switch
 
will
 
learn
 
the
 
sensor
 
into
 
the
 
panel
 
as
 
Loop
 
#1.
 
The
 
second
 
press
 
of
 
the
 
tamper
 
switch
 
will
 
learn
 
the
 
sensor
 
into
 
the
 
panel
 
as
 
Loop
 
#2,
 
and
 
the
 
third
 
press
 
of
 
the
 
tamper
 
switch
 
will
 
learn
 
the
 
sensor
 
into
 
the
 
panel
 
as
 
Loop
 
#3.
 
Pa

use
 
15
 
seconds
 
between
 
each
 
press
 
of
 
the
 
tamper
 
switch.
 
The
 
programmed
 
loop
 
number
 
of
 
the
 
sensor
 
in
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
may
 
need
 
changing
 
to
 
suit
 
the
 
operation
 
of
 
the
 
device.
 
For
 
details,
 
see
 
the
 
Installation
 
Instructions
 
included
 
with
 
the
 
sensor.
Q: Select RF Sensor # Equipment Age (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
New
The
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
new
 
or
 
existing
 
RF
 
sensors.
•If
 
thi

s
 
RF
 
sensor
 
is
 
new
 
for
 
the
 
installation,
 
leave
 
the
 
default
 
setting
 
of
 
(0)
 
New
.
•If
 
thi

s
 
RF
 
sensor
 
is
 
already
 
installed,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Existing
.
NOTE:
If
 
the
 
RF
 
sen
sor
 
has
 
more
 
than
 
one
 
loop
 
and
 
is
 
being
 
programmed
 
into
 
multiple
 
sensor
 
numbers
 
to
 
support
 
the
 
loops,
 
set
 
only
 
one
 
loop
 
as
 
“new”
 
and
 
the
 
other
 
loops
 
as
 
“existing”.
 
This
 
will
 
prevent
 
incorrect
 
inventory
 
of
 
the
 
installed
 
sensors.
Q: Select RF Sensor # Loop Number (1 to 3)
DEFAULT:
 
Va
ries
 
with
 
sensor
 
model
 
selected
The
 
2GIG
 
Door/Window
 
Contact
 
sensors
 
have
 
two
 
(2)
 
inputs:
 
an
 
internal
 
magnetic
 
contact
 
and
 
an
 
external
 
Normally
 
Closed
 
(N/C)
 
hardwired
 
input.
 
Either
 
or
 
both
 
sensor
 
inputs
 
can
 
be
 
used.
TIP:
Some
 
sensors
 
are
 
capable
 
of
 
three
 
(3)
 
loop
 
inputs.
NOTE:
Whe

n
 
using
 
both
 
the
 
internal
 
magnetic
 
contact
 
and
 
the
 
external
 
input,
 
the
 
magnet
 
contact
 
AND
 
the
 
external
 
contact
 
must
 
be
 
assigned
 
a
 
different
 
RF
 
sensor
 
number.
 
Both
 
sensor
 
numbers
 
will
 
share
 
the
 
same
 
sensor
 
serial
 
number.
•When
 
pr
ogramming
 
the
 
sensor
 
to
 
use
 
the
 
built

in
 
magnetic
 
contact,
 
set
 
the
 
loop
 
number
 
to
 
(2)
 
2
.
•When
 
pr
ogramming
 
the
 
sensor
 
to
 
use
 
its
 
hardwired
 
input,
 
set
 
the
 
loop
 
number
 
as
 
(1)
 
1
.
•When
 
pr
ogramming
 
a
 
three
 
(3)

loop
 
sensor
 
to
 
use
 
an
 
additional
 
input,
 
set
 
the
 
loop
 
number
 
as
 
(3)
 
3
.
•When
 
en
tering
 
the
 
sensor
 
number
 
for
 
the
 
sensor’s
 
loop
 
2
 
or
 
3,
 
tap
 
Paste
 
to
 
recall
 
the
 
last
 
programmed
 
sensor’s
 
serial
 
number.
 
(The
 
sensor
 
number
 
will
 
be
 
filled
 
in
 
automatically
 
if
 
Learn
 
is
 
used.)
Q: Select RF Sensor # Dialer Delay (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
If
 
this
 
feature
 
is
 
enabled,
 
the
 
delay
 
time
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
a
 
minimum
 
of
 
30
 
seconds
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
compliance.
 
To
 
set
 
the
 
(02)
 
Exit/Entry
 
2
Y
Y
(03)
 
Perimeter
YY
(04)
 
Interior
 
Follower*
Y
Y
(05)
 
Day
 
Zone
YY
(06)
 
24

Hour
 
Silent
 
Alarm*
Y
Y
(07)
 
24

Hour
 
Audible
 
Alarm*
YY
(08)
 
24

Hour
 
Auxiliary
 
Alarm*
Y
Y
(09)
 
24

Hour
 
Fire
YN
(10)
 
Interior
 
with
 
Delay*
Y
Y
(14)
 
24

Hour
 
Carbon
 
Monoxide
YN
(16)
 
24

Hour
 
Fire
 
Verification
Y
N
(23)
 
No
 
Response
 
Type*
YY
(24)
 
Silent
 
Burglary
Y
Y
Sensor
 
Type
 
(Zone)
Equipment
 
Types
(04)
 
Interior
 
Follower
(1)
 
Motion

(2)
 
Contact
(06)
 
24

Hour
 
Silent
 
Alarm
(1)
 
Contact

(11)
 
Emergency
(07)
 
24

hour
 
Audible
 
Alarm
(1)
 
Contact

(11)
 
Emergency
(08)
 
24

Hour
 
Auxiliary
(1)
 
Contact

(6)
 
Freeze

(8)
 
Water

(10)
 
Temperature

(11)
 
Emergency
(10)
 
Interior
 
with
 
Delay
(1)
 
Motion
 

(2)
 
Contact
(23)
 
No
 
Response
 
Type
(1)
 
Contact
 

(2)
 
Motion
Sensor
 
Types
 
(Zone)
RF Wired Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
44
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
delay
 
time,
 
see
 
"Q35:
 
Abort
 
Window
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0

2)"
 
on
 
page
 
56.
•RF
 
sensors
 
can
 
trigger
 
the
 
digital
 
communicator
 
immediately
 
or
 
after
 
a
 
delay.
 
The
 
default
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
causes
 
delayed
 
dialing
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor
 
number.
•For
 
imme
diate
 
dialing
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor
 
number,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
This
 
se
tting
 
for
 
CO
 
and
 
Smoke
 
Alarms
 
is
 
automatically
 
set
 
to
 
(0)
 
Disabled
,
 
and
 
this
 
sub

question
 
is
 
skipped
 
for
 
these
 
sensor
 
types.
Q: Construct RF Sensor # Voice Descriptor
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
De
fault
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
a
 
list
 
of
 
available
 
voice
 
descriptors,
 
see
 
"Voice
 
Descriptors"
 
on
 
page
 
38.
The
 
vo

ice
 
descriptors
 
are
 
the
 
words
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
announce
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor
 
if
 
this
 
sensor
 
is
 
programmed
 
for
 
voice
 
annunciation.
 
Up
 
to
 
five(5)
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
1
Tap
 
Insert
 
to
 
place
 
a
 
word
 
from
 
the
 
vocabulary
 
into
 
the
 
data
 
entry
 
field.
2
Tap
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
words,
 
or
 
enter
 
the
 
word’s
 
three
 
(3)

digit
 
index
 
number.
3
Tap
 
Insert
 
again
 
for
 
the
 
next
 
word.
 
Up
 
to
 
five
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
4
To
 
move
 
between
 
words,
 
tap
 
the
 
Fwd
 
and
 
Back
 
buttons.
5
To
 
remove
 
a
 
word,
 
tap
 
Delete
.
Q: Select RF Sensor # Reports (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enable
d
RF
 
sensors
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
to
 
trigger
 
a
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
or
 
not.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
enables
 
reporting
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor
 
number.
•To
 
pr

event
 
reporting
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor
 
number,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q: Select RF Sensor # Supervised (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enable
d
When
 
a
 
sensor
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
supervised,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
expect
 
regular
 
timed
 
signals
 
from
 
this
 
sensor
 
or
 
else
 
a
 
sensor
 
supervisory
 
trouble
 
alert
 
will
 
occur.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
supervision
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor.
•To
 
turn
 
of
f
 
supervision
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
Po

rtable
 
sensors
 
such
 
as
 
panic
 
buttons
 
should
 
not
 
be
 
set
 
as
 
supervised
 
if
 
the
 
sensor
 
will
 
be
 
removed
 
from
 
the
 
premises
 
at
 
times.
Q: Select RF Sensor# Chime (00 to 13)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Dis
abled
Each
 
RF
 
sensor
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
sound
 
a
 
“ding

dong”
 
chime
 
and/or
 
sound
 
its
 
voice
 
descriptor
 
when
 
the
 
sensor
 
is
 
triggered.
 
This
 
step
 
determines
 
the
 
initial
 
setting
 
for
 
the
 
sensor.
 
The
 
end
 
user
 
can
 
change
 
the
 
chime
 
setting
 
for
 
sensors
 
using
 
Chime
 
Setup
 
in
 
the
 
User
 
Toolbox.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
disables
 
the
 
chime
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor.
•If
 
a
 
ch

ime
 
and/or
 
voice
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
sensor,
 
choose
 
one
 
of
 
the
 
other
 
chime
 
options:
Code
Sensor
 
Chime
(0)
 
Disabled
(1)
 
Voice
 
Only
(2)
 
Ding

Dong
 
with
 
Voice
 
#1
(3)
 
Ding

Dong
 
#2
(4)
 
Ding

Dong
 
with
 
Voice
 
#2
(5)
 
Ding

Dong
 
#1
(6)
 
Ding

Ding
(7)
Ding

Ding
 
with
 
Voice
(8)
 
Ding

Dong
 
#3
(9)
 
Ding

Dong
 
with
 
Voice
 
#3
(10)
 
Chime
 
#1
(11)
 
Chime
 
#1
 
with
 
Voice
 
#1
(12)
 
Chime
 
#2
(13)
 
Chime
 
#2
 
with
 
Vo
ice
 
#2
Wired Sensor Programming
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
with
 
up
 
to
 
two
 
(2)
 
wired
 
sensors.
 
The
 
wired
 
sensors
 
are
 
hardwired
 
contact
 
loops
 
connected
 
to
 
the
 
loop
 
input
 
terminals
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
terminal
 
strip.
 
To
 
see
 
where
 
the
 
two
 
(2)
 
hardwired
 
sensors
 
can
 
be
 
wired
 
into
 
the
 
Terminal
 
Block,
 
see
 
the
 
"Terminal
 
Block
 
Wi
ring
 
Diagram"
 
on
 
page
 
20.
CAUTION:
Wired
 
sensors
 
cannot
 
be
 
used
 
for
 
a
 
CO
 
or
 
Fire
 
sensor
 
loop.
IMPORTANT:
Note
 
that
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
reports
 
as
 
below:
•Wired
 
Sensor
 
#1
 
=
 
Re
ports
 
as
 
Sensor
 
#49
•Wired
 
Sensor
 
#2
 
=
 
Re
ports
 
as
 
Sensor
 
#50
See
 
F

igure
 
52
  
Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming
 
Outline
 
on
 
the
 
next
 
page
 
for
 
the
 
steps
 
required
 
to
 
program
 
wired
 
sensors
 
into
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
options
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
for
 
each
 
wired
 
sensor
 
are:

Q2:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
Number
.
 
Select
 
1
 
or
 
2.

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Type
.
 
Select
 
the
 
zone.
 
For
 
example,
 
(01)
 
Exit/Entry
 
1
,
 
(02)
 
Exit/Entry
 
2
,
 
(03)
 
Perimeter
,
 
and
 
so
 
on.
 
See
 
"Zone
 
Numbering"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
35.

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Type
.
 
Some
 
sensor
 
types
 
(zones)
 
will
 
prompt
 
you
 
to
 
specify
 
the
 
equipment
 
type.
 
Other
 
sensor
 
types
 
will
 
not
 
prompt
 
you
 
for
 
an
 
equipment
 
type.

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
 
Select
 
the
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
equipment
 
code
 
that
 
corresponds
 
to
 
the
 
appropriate
 
sensor
 
model.
 
See
 
"Equipment
 
Code
s"
 
on
 
page
 
40.

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Age
.
 
Specify
 
whether
 
the
 
sensor
 
is
 
a
 
(0)
 
New
 
or
 
(1)
 
Existing
 
sensor
.

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Normal
 
State
.
 
Choose
 
between
 
(0)
 
Not
 
Used
,
 
(1)
 
Closed
,
 
(2)
 
Open
,
 
(3)
 
End

Of

Line

Resistor
.
 

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Dialer
 
Delay
.
 
Specify
 
whether
 
to
 
use
 
delayed
 
or
 
instant
 
digital
 
communicator
 
reports
 
for
 
the
 
sensor.
 
The
 
delay
 
time
 
is
 
set
 
on
 
the
 
Dialer
 
Abort
 
screen. Installer Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
45

Q:
 
Wired
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
.
 
Specify
 
the
 
name
 
assigned
 
to
 
the
 
sensor
 
that
 
is
 
announced
 
if
 
this
 
feature
 
is
 
programmed.

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Reports
.
 
Specify
 
whether
 
or
 
not
 
to
 
send
 
digital
 
communicator
 
reports
 
for
 
the
 
sensor.

Q:
 
Wi

red
 
Sensor
 
#
 
Chime
.
 
Select
 
voice
 
announcement
 
and
 
chime
 
options
 
for
 
the
 
sensor.
Q2: Wired Sensor Pr
ogramming Outline
Figure 52
Wired Sensor Programming Outline
Scroll
 
between
 
op
Ɵ
ons
 
using
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrows.
 
Move
 
to
 
the
 
previous
 
or
 
next
 
prompt
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows.
1
To
 
program
 
another
 
sensor
 
tap
 
Next
.
2
To
 
exit
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
 
then
 
End
 
and
 
Exit
.
 
Upon
 
exit,
 
the
 
panel
 
takes
 
several
 
seconds
 
to
 
restart.
Summary of Wired Sensor # Screen
After
 
setting
 
all
 
the
 
options
 
for
 
a
 
sensor,
 
the
 
wired
 
sensor
 
summary
 
screen
 
is
 
displayed.
 
The
 
screen
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
displayed
 
for
 
programmed
 
sensors
 
during
 
wired
 
sensor
 
program
 
editing
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 
Sum
 
button.
•While
 
pr
ogramming
 
each
 
wired
 
sensor
 
remember
 
that
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrow
 
bu
Ʃ
ons
 
step
 
through
 
each
 
of
 
the
 
wired
 
sensor
 
numbers.
•To
 
ret

urn
 
to
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Edit
 
Current
 
or
 
Edit
 
Next
.
•Tap
 
Skip
 
to
 
go
 
to
 
qu
estion
 
number
 
Q3
 
(RF
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming).
 
See
 
"Wireless
 
(R

F)
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
47.
Figure 53
Summary of Wired Sensor # Screen
NOTE:
For
 
the
 
detailed
 
steps
 
of
 
programming
 
a
 
wired
 
sensor,
 
see
 
"Wired
 
Se

nsor
 
Programming
 
Questions"
 
on
 
page
 
45.
Wired Sensor Programming Questions
Q2: Select Wired Sensor # (1-2)
Two
 
hardwired
 
loops
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
as
 
sensors
 
with
 
each
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
options
 
for
 
each
 
wired
 
sensor
 
are
 
programmed
 
with
 
sub

option
 
questions.
•Begin
 
by
 
en
tering
 
the
 
wired
 
sensor
 
number
 
or
 
select
 
it
 
using
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows.
•After
 
se

lecting
 
the
 
wired
 
sensor
 
number,
 
program
 
the
 
wired
 
sensor
 
details
 
by
 
using
 
the
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows
 
to
 
select
 
each
 
of
 
the
 
sub

options.
NOTE:
To
 
sk
ip
 
wired
 
sensor
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
 
to
 
jump
 
from
 
question
 
Q2
 
to
 
question
 
Q3.
 
See
 
"Wireless
 
(R

F)
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
47.
Q: Select Wired Sensor# Type
DEFAULT:
 
(00)
 
Unused
Each
 
wired
 
sensor
 
needs
 
to
 
be
 
assigned
 
to
 
a
 
sensor
 
type.
Select
 
the
 
sensor
 
type
 
that
 
matches
 
the
 
wired
 
sensor’s
 
func
Ɵ
on
 
using
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
or
 
enter
 
the
 
sensor
 
type
 
number
 
directly
 
on
 
the
 
keypad.
In
 
the
 
table
 
below,
 
a
 
“YES”
 
indicates
 
the
 
sensor
 
type
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
for
 
the
 
wi

red
 
sensor.
 
An
 
“NO”
 
indicates
 
the
 
sensor
 
type
 
is
 
not
 
used.
Sensor
 
Types
 
(Zones)
RF

Sensors
Wired
 
Sensors
(00)
 
Unused
Yes
Yes
(01)
 
Exit/Entry
 
1
Yes
Yes
(02)
 
Exit/Entry
 
2
Yes
Yes
(03)
 
Perimeter
Yes
Yes Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
46
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Q: Select Wired Sensor# Equipment Type
DEFAULT:
 
Va
ries
 
by
 
wired
 
sensor
 
type
NOTE:
This
 
que
stion
 
is
 
only
 
displayed
 
when
 
certain
 
sensor
 
types
 
(zones)
 
are
 
selected.
The
 
e

quipment
 
type
 
selection
 
will
 
affect
 
the
 
sensor’s
 
extended
 
reporting
 
code.
The
 
following
 
sensor
 
types
 
require
 
equipment
 
type
 
selection:
Select
 
the
 
equipment
 
type
 
that
 
matches
 
the
 
sensor
 
equipment
 
using
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows,
 
or
 
enter
 
the
 
equipment
 
type
 
number
 
directly
 
on
 
the
 
keypad.
NOTE:
This
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
does
 
not
 
provide
 
auxiliary
 
accessory
 
output
 
power.
Connecting
 
a
 
h
ardwire
 
PIR
 
using
 
equipment
 
type
 
“motion”
 
will
 
require
 
an
 
external
 
stand

alone
 
battery
 
backed

up
 
power
 
supply
 
for
 
the
 
PIR.
Q: Wired Sensor # Equipment Code (0-9999)
DEFAULT:
 
(0

)
Select
 
the
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
equipment
 
code
 
that
 
corresponds
 
to
 
the
 
appropriate
 
sensor
 
model.
 
See
 
"Equipment
 
Codes"
 
on
 
page
 
40.
Q: Select Wired Sensor# Equipment Age (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
New
The
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
new
 
or
 
existing
 
wired
 
sensors.
•If
 
this
 
wir
ed
 
sensor
 
is
 
new
 
for
 
the
 
installation,
 
leave
 
the
 
default
 
setting
 
of
 
(0)
 
New
.
•If
 
this
 
wir
ed
 
sensor
 
is
 
already
 
installed,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Existing
.
Q: Select Wired Sensor# Normal State
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Not
 
Us
ed
The
 
two
 
hardwired
 
loops
 
can
 
be
 
wired
 
for
 
normally
 
open
 
(N/O)
 
or
 
normally
 
closed
 
(N/C)
 
contacts,
 
or
 
for
 
end

of

line
 
(EOL)
 
resistor.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Not
 
Used
 
disables
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor.
•To
 
us

e
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor,
 
select
 
the
 
way
 
the
 
loop
 
is
 
wired:
Wired
 
Sensor
 
Normal
 
St
ate

(0)
 
No

t
 
Used

(1)
 
Cl

osed

(2)
 
Op

en

(3)
 
En

d

of

Line
 
Resistor
Q: Select Wired Sensor# Dialer Delay (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
If
 
this
 
feature
 
is
 
enabled,
 
the
 
delay
 
time
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
a
 
minimum
 
of
 
30
 
seconds
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
compliance.
 
To
 
set
 
the
 
delay
 
time,
 
see
 
"Q35:
 
Abort
 
Window
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
(0

2)"
 
on
 
page
 
56
.
Wired
 
sensors
 
can
 
trigger
 
the
 
digital
 
communicator
 
immediately
 
or
 
after
 
a
 
delay.
 
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
causes
 
delayed
 
dialing
 
for
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor
 
number.
•For
 
im

mediate
 
dialing
 
for
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor
 
number,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled.
Q: Construct Wired Sensor # Voice Descriptor
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
Default
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
a
 
list
 
of
 
voice
 
descriptors,
 
see
 
"Voice
 
De

scriptors"
 
on
 
pa

ge
 
38.
The
 
voic

e
 
descriptors
 
are
 
the
 
words
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
announce
 
for
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor
 
if
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor
 
is
 
programmed
 
for
 
voice
 
annunciation.
 
Up
 
to
 
five
 
(5)
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
1
Tap
 
Insert
 
to
 
place
 
a
 
word
 
from
 
the
 
vocabulary
 
into
 
the
 
data
 
entry
 
field.
2
Use
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
words,
 
or
 
enter
 
the
 
word’s
 
three
 
(3)

digit
 
number.
3
Tap
 
Insert
 
again
 
for
 
the
 
next
 
word.
 
Up
 
to
 
five
 
(5)
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
4
To
 
move
 
between
 
words,
 
tap
 
the
 
Fwd
 
and
 
Back
 
buttons.
5
To
 
remove
 
a
 
word,
 
tap
 
Delete
.
Q: Select Wired Sensor# Reports (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Wired
 
sensors
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
to
 
trigger
 
a
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
or
 
not.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
activates
 
reporting
 
for
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor
 
number.
•To
 
prev

ent
 
reporting
 
for
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor
 
number,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q: Select Wired Sensor# Chime (00 to 13)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Each
 
wired
 
sensor
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
sound
 
a
 
“ding

dong”
 
chime
 
and/or
 
sound
 
its
 
voice
 
descriptor
 
when
 
the
 
sensor
 
is
 
triggered.
(04)
 
Interior
 
Follower
Yes
Yes
(05)
 
Day
 
Zone
Yes
Yes
(06)
 
24

Hour
 
Silent
 
Alarm
Yes
Yes
(07)
 
24

Hour
 
Audible
 
Alarm
Yes
Yes
(08)
 
24

Hour
 
Auxiliary
 
Alarm
Yes
Yes
(09)
 
24

Hour
 
Fire
Yes
No
(10)
 
Interior
 
with
 
Delay
Yes
Yes
(14)
 
24

Hour
 
Carbon
 
Monoxide
Yes
No
Sensor
 
Types
 
(Zones)
Equipment
 
Types
 
Available
(04)
 
Interior
 
Follower
(1)=motion

(2)=contact
(06)
 
24

Hour
 
Silent
 
Alarm
(1)=contact

(11)=emergency
(07)
 
24

Hour
 
Audible
 
Alarm
(1)=contact(

11)=emergency
(08)
 
24

Hour
 
Auxiliary
(1)=contact

(6)=freeze

(8)=water
 

(10)=termperature
 

(11)=emergency
(10)
 
Interior
 
with
 
Delay
(1)=motion

(2)=contact
(23)
 
No
 
Response
 
Type
(1)=contact

(2)=motion
Sensor
 
Types
 
(Zones)
RF

Sensors
Wired
 
Sensors Installer Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
47
•The
 
default
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
inactivates
 
the
 
chime
 
for
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor.
•If
 
a
 
chime
 
a
nd/or
 
voice
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
this
 
wired
 
sensor,
 
choose
 
one
 
of
 
the
 
other
 
chime
 
options:
Sensor Chime
Code
 
Sensor
 
Chime
(0)
 
Disabled
(1)
 
Voice
 
Only
(2)
 
Ding

Dong
 
with
 
Voice
 
#1
(3)
 
Ding

Dong
 
#2
(4)
 
Ding

Dong
 
with
 
Voice
 
#2
(5)
 
Ding

Dong
 
#1
(6)
 
Ding

Ding
(7)
Ding

Ding
 
with
 
Voice
(8)
 
Ding

Dong
 
#3
(9)
 
Ding

Dong
 
with
 
Voice
 
#3
(10)
 
Chime
 
#1
(11)
 
Chime
 
#1
 
with
 
Voice
 
#1
(12)
 
Chime
 
#2
(13)
 
Chime
 
#2
 
with
 
Vo
ice
 
#2
Wireless (RF) Key Fob Programming
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
with
 
up
 
to
 
eight
 
(8)
 
RF
 
key
 
fobs.
Programming
 
the
 
fobs
 
into
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
involves
 
selecting
 
the
 
sensor
 
number
 
for
 
a
 
particular
 
device,
 
setting
 
or
 
learning
 
the
 
serial
 
number,
 
and
 
selecting
 
the
 
other
 
options
 
for
 
the
 
sensor.
IMPORTANT:
RF
 
key
 
fobs
 
1
 ‐ 
8
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Con

trol
 
Panel
 
as
 
sensors
 
51
 ‐ 
58
 
(opening/closing,
 
emergency,
 
and
 
low
 
battery
 
reports).
See
 
Figure
 
54
  
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming
 
Outline
 
for
 
the
 
steps
 
required
 
to
 
program
 
fobs
 
into
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
options
 
that
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
for
 
each
 
fob
 
are:

Q3:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
Number
.
 
Select
 
key
 
fob
 
number
 
1

8.

Q:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
#
 
Used
.
 
Select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
 

Q:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
 
Select
 
the
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
equipment
 
code
 
that
 
corresponds
 
to
 
the
 
appropriate
 
keyfob.
 
See
 
"Equipment
 
Code
s"
 
on
 
page
 
40.

Q:
 
En

ter
 
Fob
 
#
 
Other
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
 
Enter
 
the
 
special
 
equipment
 
code.
 
This
 
is
 
only
 
required
 
when
 
the
 
Key
 
Fob
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(0000)
 
Other
.

Q:
 
En

ter
 
Fob
 
#
 
Serial
 
#
.
 
Enter
 
the
 
serial
 
number
 
(typically
 
a
 
label
 
on
 
the
 
keyfob
 
or
 
the
 
keyfob
 
packaging)
 
or
 
tap
 
Shift
 
then
 
Learn
 
to
 
place
 
the
 
panel
 
into
 
learning
 
mode.
 
Then
 
trip
 
the
 
keyfob
 
to
 
transmit
 
the
 
serial
 
number
 
to
 
the
 
panel.

Q:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Age
.
 
Specify
 
whether
 
the
 
sensor
 
is
 
a
 
(0)
 
New
 
or
 
(1)
 
Existing
 
sensor.

Q:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
#
 
Emergency
 
Key
.
 
Choose
 
the
 
function
 
of
 
double

tapping
 
the
 
top
 
buttons
 
(0)
 
Disabled
,
 
(1)
 
Auxiliary
 
Alarm
,
 
(2)
 
Audible
 
Alarm
,
 
(3)
 
Silent
 
Panic
,
 
or
 
(4)
 
Fire
.
 

Q:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
#
 
Key
 
#
 
Can
 
Disarm
.
 
Choose
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
or
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
to
 
specify
 
if
 
the
 
key
 
fob
 
is
 
allowed
 
to
 
disarm
 
the
 
system.

Q:
 
Cons

truct
 
Fob
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
.
 
Construct
 
the
 
name
 
assigned
 
for
 
the
 
keyfob
 
announcement.
 
See
 
"Voice
 
De

scriptors"
 
on
 
page
 
38.

Q:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
#
 
Arm
 
No
 
Delay
.
 
Choose
 
if
 
key
 
fob
 
will
 
arm
 
the
 
system
 
instantly
 
without
 
an
 
exit
 
delay.

Q:
 
Select
 
Fo
b
 
#
 
Key
 
#
 
Output
.
 
Select
 
an
 
action
 
for
 
the
 
key
 
fob
 
auxiliary
 
button.
Fob
 
#Reports
 
as
 
Sensor
 
#
1
51
2
52
3
53
4
 
54
5
55
6
56
7
57
8
58
Fob
 
#Reports
 
as
 
Sensor
 
# Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
48
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Key Fob Programming Outline
Figure 54
Key Fob Programming Outline
Scroll
 
between
 
op
Ɵ
ons
 
using
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrows.
 
Move
 
to
 
the
 
previous
 
or
 
next
 
prompt
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows.
1
To
 
program
 
another
 
sensor
 
tap
 
Next
.
2
To
 
exit
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
,
 
then
 
End
,
 
and
 
then
 
Exit
.
 
Upon
 
exit,
 
the
 
panel
 
takes
 
several
 
seconds
 
to
 
restart.
 
TIP:
Tap
 
Skip
 
to
 
jump
 
to
 
question
 
Q4.
 
See
 
"RF
 
Ke

ypad
 
Programming
 
Que
stions"
 
on
 
page
 
50.
Summary of RF Key Fob # Screen
After
 
setting
 
all
 
the
 
options
 
for
 
a
 
key
 
fob,
 
the
 
Summary
 
of
 
Fob
 
#
 
screen
 
is
 
displayed.
 
The
 
screen
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
displayed
 
for
 
programmed
 
keyfobs
 
during
 
keyfob
 
program
 
editing
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 
Sum
 
button.
•While
 
pr
ogramming
 
each
 
key
 
fob
 
remember
 
that
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrow
 
bu
Ʃ
ons
 
step
 
through
 
each
 
of
 
the
 
key
 
fob
 
numbers.
•To
 
re

turn
 
to
 
programming,
 
tap
 
the
 
Edit
 
Current
 
or
 
Edit
 
Next
 
buttons.
• Tapping
 
Skip
 
goe
s
 
to
 
question
 
number
 
Q4
 
(RF
 
Keypad
 
Programming).
 
See
 
"Wireless
 
(R

F)
 
Keypad
 
Programming"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
49.
RF Key Fob Programming Questions
Q3: Select Fob # (1 to 8)
Up
 
to
 
eight
 
(8)
 
wireless
 
four
 
(4)

button
 
key
 
fobs
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
each
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
Key
 
fobs
 
reports
 
as
 
sensors
 
51

58.
 
The
 
options
 
for
 
each
 
fob
 
are
 
programmed
 
with
 
sub

option
 
questions.
•Begin
 
by
 
en
tering
 
the
 
fob
 
number
 
or
 
select
 
it
 
using
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows.
•Program
 
the
 
ke
y
 
fobs
 
by
 
using
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows
 
to
 
select
 
the
 
sub

options.
NOTE:
To
 
skip
 
RF
 
ke
y
 
fob
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
 
to
 
jump
 
from
 
question
 
Q3
 
to
 
question
 
Q4
 
(RF
 
keypad
 
programming).
 
See
 
"RF
 
Ke

ypad
 
Programming
 
Questions"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
50.
Q: Select Fob # Used (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
U
nused
Key
 
fobs
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
or
 
not.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Unused
 
sets
 
all
 
key
 
fobs
 
as
 
unused.
•To
 
en

able
 
programming
 
for
 
this
 
key
 
fob,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Used
.
Q: Select Key Fob # Equipment Code (0-9999)
DEFAULT:
 
(0000)
 
Othe
r
The
 
key
 
fob
 
equipment
 
code
 
defines
 
the
 
sensor’s
 
manufacturer
 
and
 
type.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
(0000)
 
Other
.
• Select
 
(08
66)
 
2GIG
 
4

button
 
Key
 
Fob
 
remote
 
for
 
a
 
2GIG

KEY2
 
key
 
fob
 
remote.
• Select
 
(05
77)
 
Existing
 
Key
 
Fob
 
for
 
an
 
existing
 
key
 
fob
 
remote.
NOTE:
On

ly
 
2GIG
 
4

Button
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Remotes
 
are
 
compatible
 
with
 
this
 
system.
Q: Enter Key Fob # Other Equipment Code (0-9999)
DEFAULT:
 
0
NOTE:
Th

is
 
question
 
is
 
only
 
displayed
 
if
 
(0000)
 
Other
 
is
 
selected
 
for
 
a
 
key
 
fob’s
 
equipment
 
code.
•The
 
e

quipment
 
code
 
is
 
a
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
code
 
that
 
is
 
assigned
 
to
 
the
 
model
 
of
 
key
 
fob
 
being
 
used.
•Enter
 
the
 
e
quipment
 
code
 
number
 
for
 
the
 
key
 
fob. Installer Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
49
Q: Enter Fob # Serial Number (7 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
0000000
Ke
y
 
fob
 
serial
 
numbers
 
can
 
be
 
manually
 
entered
 
or
 
learned
 
from
 
the
 
fob.
•For
 
man

ual
 
entry,
 
enter
 
the
 
fob
 
number
 
that
 
was
 
logged
 
for
 
the
 
fob
 
being
 
programmed.
 
Use
 
the
 
Shift
 
button
 
to
 
access
 
alpha
 
characters.
•For
 
au

tomatic
 
entry,
 
tap
 
Shift
,
 
then
 
tap
 
Learn
.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
wait
 
for
 
a
 
fob
 
transmission.
 
Trigger
 
the
 
fob
 
being
 
programmed
 
and
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
learn
 
the
 
fob’s
 
serial
 
number.
Q: Select Fob # Equipment Age (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
New
The
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
new
 
or
 
existing
 
key
 
fobs.
•If
 
thi

s
 
fob
 
is
 
new
 
for
 
the
 
installation,
 
leave
 
the
 
default
 
setting
 
of
 
(0)
 
New
.
•If
 
thi

s
 
fob
 
is
 
already
 
installed,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Existing
.
Q: Select Fob # Emergency Key (0 to 4)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disable
d
Pressing
 
the
  
and
  
buttons
 
on
 
a
 
key
 
fob
 
at
 
the
 
same
 
time
 
for
 
5
 
seconds
 
can
 
trigger
 
an
 
emergency
 
alarm.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
inactivates
 
the
 
emergency
 
function
 
the
 
fob
 
#.
•To
 
ena

ble
 
the
 
emergency
 
function
 
for
 
this
 
fob,
 
select
 
one
 
(1)
 
of
 
the
 
four
 
(4)
 
options:
•(0)
 
Disable
d
•(1)
 
Aux

iliary
 
Alarm
•(2)
 
Audi

ble
 
Alarm
•(3)
 
Si

lent
 
Panic

(4)
 
Fire
Q: Select Fob# Key # Can Disarm (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enable
d
As
 
an
 
installer,
 
consult
 
the
 
user
 
as
 
to
 
whether
 
to
 
set
 
the
 
key
 
fob
 
to
 
allow
 
disarming
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
with
 
the
 
key
 
fob’s
 
 
button.
 
If
 
the
 
user
 
wants
 
the
 
key
 
fob
 
used
 
as
 
a
 
stationary
 
wall
 
fob,
 
it
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
prevent
 
using
 
the
 
key
 
fo
b
 
to
 
disarm
 
the
 
system.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
the
 
fob
 
to
 
disarm
 
the
 
system.
•To
 
not
 
allo
w
 
the
 
fob
 
to
 
disarm
 
the
 
system,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled.
Q: Construct Fob# Voice Descriptor
DEFAULT:
 
(#)
 
Ke
yfob
The
 
voice
 
descriptor
 
are
 
the
 
actual
 
the
 
words
 
that
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
use
 
for
 
this
 
fob
 
for
 
low
 
battery
 
announcements
 
and
 
log
 
entries.
 
Up
 
to
 
five
 
(5)
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
1
Tap
 
Insert
 
to
 
place
 
a
 
word
 
from
 
the
 
vocabulary
 
into
 
the
 
data
 
entry
 
field.
2
Use
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
words,
 
or
 
enter
 
the
 
word’s
 
three
 
(3)

digit
 
index
 
number.
3
Tap
 
Insert
 
again
 
for
 
the
 
next
 
word.
 
Up
 
to
 
five
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
4
To
 
remove
 
a
 
word,
 
tap
 
Delete
.
Q: Select Fob (#) Arm No Delay (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Dis
abled
Key
 
fobs
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
arm
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
with
 
or
 
without
 
an
 
entry
 
delay.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
sets
 
this
 
fob
 
to
 
arm
 
the
 
system
 
with
 
an
 
entry
 
delay.
•To
 
se

t
 
this
 
fob
 
to
 
arm
 
the
 
system
 
without
 
an
 
entry
 
delay,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q: Select Fob# Key 4 Output (0-2)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Dis
abled
Press
 
the
 
key
 
fob’s
  
auxiliary
 
button
 
to
 
trigger
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
open
 
collector
 
output.
The
 
default
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
deactivates
 
the
 
fob’s
 
auxiliary
 
button.
To
 
use
 
this
 
fob’s
 
auxiliary
 
button,
 
select
 
the
 
output
 
function:
•(0)
 
Disable
d
•(1)
 
T

oggle
 
Output

(2)
 
Momen
tary
 
Output
Wireless (RF) Keypad Programming
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
with
 
up
 
to
 
four
 
(4)
 
RF
 
keypads
 
or
 
RF
 
touch
 
screen
 
keypads.
NOTE:
RF
 
Ke
ypads
 
1
 ‐ 
4
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
as
 
sensors
 
59
 ‐ 
62
 
(for
 
emergency,
 
and
 
low
 
battery
 
reports)
RF
 
Keypad
 
Reporting
 
Codes
Keypad
 
1
Reports
 
as
 
sensor
 
#59
Keypad
 
2
Reports
 
as
 
sensor
 
#60
Keypad
 
3
Reports
 
as
 
sensor
 
#61
Keypad
 
4
Reports
 
as
 
sens
or
 
#62
.
•User
 
Co

des
 
#1
 ‐ 
#8
 
are
 
reported
 
for
 
openings
 
and
 
closings
•User
 
Co

de
 
#0
 
is
 
reported
 
for
 
Quick
 
Arming
The
 
fo

llowing
 
options
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
for
 
each
 
RF
 
keypad:
 

Select
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
Number
.
 
Select
 
keypad
 
number
 
1

4.

Select
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
#
 
Used
.
 
Enable
 
or
 
disable
 
the
 
keypad.
 

Select
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
 
Select
 
the
 
equipment
 
code
 
for
 
the
 
keypad.
 
See
 
"Equipment
 
Codes"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
40.

Select
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
#
 
Other
 
Equipment
 
Code
.
 
If
 
you
 
selected
 
(0000)
 
Other
,
 
enter
 
the
 
special
 
equipment
 
code.

Select
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
#
 
Serial
 
#
.
 
Enter
 
the
 
serial
 
number
 
from
 
the
 
keypad
 
or
 
“learn”
 
by
 
sending
 
a
 
signal.

Select
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
#
 
Equipment
 
Age
.
 
Select
 
(0)
 
New
 
or
 
(1)
 
Existing
.

Select
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
#
 
Emergency
 
Keys
.
 
Select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
or
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
 

Co

nstruct
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
#
 
Voice
 
Descriptor
.Construct
 
the
 
name
 
assigned
 
for
 
the
 
keypad
 
announcement.
 
See
 
“Voice
 
De

scriptors”
 
on
 
page
 
38. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
50
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
RF Keypad Programming Outline
Figure 55
Keypad Programming Outline
Scroll
 
between
 
op
Ɵ
ons
 
using
 
the
 ← 
and
 → 
arrows.
 
Move
 
to
 
the
 
previous
 
or
 
next
 
prompt
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows.
1
To
 
program
 
another
 
sensor
 
tap
 
Next
.
2
To
 
exit
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
,
 
then
 
End
,
 
and
 
then
 
Exit
.
 
Upon
 
exit,
 
the
 
panel
 
takes
 
several
 
seconds
 
to
 
restart.
 
3
Tap
 
Skip
 
to
 
jump
 
to
 
question
 
Q5.
 
Summary of RF Keypad Screen
After
 
setting
 
all
 
the
 
options
 
for
 
a
 
sensor,
 
the
 
RF
 
keypad
 
summary
 
screen
 
is
 
displayed.
 
The
 
screen
 
can
 
also
 
be
 
displayed
 
for
 
programmed
 
RF
 
keypads
 
by
 
tapping
 
the
 
Sum
 
button.
•To
 
ret

urn
 
to
 
programming,
 
tap
 
the
 
Edit
 
Current
 
or
 
Edit
 
Next
 
buttons.
• Tapping
 
Sk
ip
 
goes
 
to
 
question
 
Q5
 
(Control
 
Panel
 
programming).
•To
 
exi

t
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
 
then
 
End
 
and
 
Exit
.
 
Upon
 
exit,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
takes
 
several
 
seconds
 
to
 
restart.
RF Keypad Programming Questions
Q4: Select RF Keypad # (1 to 4)
Up
 
to
 
four
 
(4)
 
wireless
 
keypads
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
for
 
use
 
with
 
each
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
options
 
for
 
each
 
sensor
 
are
 
programmed
 
with
 
sub

option
 
questions:
•Begin
 
by
 
en
tering
 
the
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
number
 
or
 
select
 
it
 
using
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows.
•Program
 
the
 
RF
 
ke
ypads
 
by
 
using
 
the
 ↑ 
and
 ↓ 
arrows
 
to
 
select
 
the
 
sub

options.
To
 
ski

p
 
RF
 
Keypad
 
programming,
 
tap
 
Skip
 
to
 
jump
 
from
 
question
 
Q4
 
to
 
question
 
Q5
 
(Exit
 
Delay
 
programming).
Q: Select RF Keypad (#) Used (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
U
nused
Users
 
can
 
use
 
RF
 
keypads
 
together
 
with
 
a
 
Control
 
Panel
 
or
 
not.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Unused
 
sets
 
all
 
RF
 
keypads
 
as
 
unused.
•To
 
en

able
 
programming
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
keypad,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Used
.
Q: Select RF Keypad (#) Equipment Code (0-9999)
DEFAULT:
 
(0000)
 
Othe
r
The
 
RF
 
keypad
 
equipment
 
code
 
defines
 
the
 
sensor’s
 
manufacturer
 
and
 
type.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
(0000)
 
Other
.
• Select
 
(

0867)
 
2GIG
 
Wireless
 
Keypad
.
• Select
 
(10
59)
 
2GIG
 
TS1
 
Wireless
 
Touchscreen
 
Keypad
.
NOTE:
Th

e
 
2GIG
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypad
 
is
 
not
 
intended
 
for
 
UL
 
985:
 
Household
 
Burglar

Alarm
 
System
 
Units
 
installations.
Q: Enter RF Keypad # Other Equipment Code (0-9999)
DEFAULT:
 
0
NOTE:
Th

is
 
question
 
is
 
only
 
displayed
 
if
 
(0000)
 
Other
 
is
 
selected
 
as
 
the
 
RF
 
keypad’s
 
equipment
 
code.
IMPORTANT:
The
 
e
quipment
 
code
 
is
 
a
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
code
 
that
 
is
 
assigned
 
to
 
the
 
appropriate
 
keypad
 
model
 
being
 
used.
•Enter
 
the
 
e
quipment
 
code
 
number
 
for
 
the
 
RF
 
Keypad.
Q: Enter RF Keypad# Serial Number (7 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
0000000
or
RF
 
Keypad
 
(#)
 
Keypad
 
ID
 
(read

only)
Serial
 
numbers
 
for
 
standard
 
wireless
 
keypads
 
can
 
be
 
manually
 
entered
 
or
 
learned
 
from
 
the
 
keypad.
 
For
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypads,
 
serial
 
numbers
 
can
 
only
 
be
 
learned
 
from
 
the
 
keypad.
 
Read

only
 
with
 
Keypad
 
ID’s
 
refer
 
to
 
the
 
installer
 
being
 
unable
 
to
 
manually
 
input
 
an
 
id.
Sta
ndard
 
Keypads
:
•For
 
manual
 
entry,
 
enter
 
the
 
Wireless
 
Keypad
 
that
 
was
 
logged
 
for
 
the
 
keypad
 
being
 
programmed.
 
Tap
 
the
 
Shift
 
button
 
to
 
access
 
alpha
 
characters.
•For
 
aut

omatic
 
entry,
 
tap
 
Shift
 
and
 
then
 
Learn
.
 
This
 
places
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
into
 
learning
 
mode.
 
When
 
you
 
trigger
 
the
 
keypad
 
the
 
sensor
 
for
 
the
 
keypad
 
being
 
programmed,
 
it
 
sends
 
its
 
serial
 
number
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel. Installer Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
51
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypads
 
(only
 
available
 
in
 
some
 
regions)
:
•For
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypads
 
tap
 
Learn
.The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
displays
 
the
 
“Pair
 
with
 
TS

1.
 
Initiating
 
learning
 
process.”
 
Tap
 
the
 
keypad’s
 
Pair
 
with
 
Panel
 
button.
 
When
 
complete,
 
the
 
keypad
 
and
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
display
 
“The
 
learn
 
operation
 
succeeded”
 
message.
•The
 
Con

trol
 
Panel
 
displays
 
“RF
 
Keypad
 
(#1

4)”
 
to
 
identify
 
the
 
keypad.
•The
 
ke

ypad
 
displays
 
“Network
 
ID:
 
xxxx”
 
which
 
is
 
its
 
unique
 
serial
 
number.
•Tap
 
OK
 
on
 
bot
h
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
and
 
the
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypad
 
to
 
continue.
NOTE:
The
 
Wi
reless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
Keypad
 
will
 
display
 
“The
 
security
 
system
 
is
 
temporarily
 
not
 
operational”
 
after
 
learning
 
the
 
Keypad.
 
This
 
is
 
normal,
 
and
 
will
 
be
 
displayed
 
anytime
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
in
 
system
 
configuration
 
(programming)
 
mode.
Q: Select RF Keypad# Equipment Age (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
New
The
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
used
 
with
 
new
 
or
 
existing
 
RF
 
keypads.
•If
 
this
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
is
 
new
 
for
 
the
 
installation,
 
leave
 
the
 
default
 
of
 
(0)
 
New
.
•If
 
this
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad
 
is
 
already
 
installed,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Existing
.
Q: Select RF Keypad# Emergency Keys (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enable
d
NOTE:
This
 
ste
p
 
is
 
not
 
displayed
 
for
 
Wireless
 
Touch
 
Screen
 
keypads.
Standard
 
wir
eless
 
keypads
 
have
 
24

hour
 
emergency
 
buttons
 
labeled
 
Fire
 
and
 
Police.
•The
 
de

fault
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
enables
 
this
 
RF
 
Keypad’s
 
emergency
 
keys.
•To
 
dis

able
 
this
 
RF
 
Keypad’s
 
emergency
 
keys,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
,
 
the
 
keys
 
will
 
not
 
be
 
able
 
to
 
trigger
 
an
 
alarm
 
or
 
report.
NOTE:
The
 
RF
 
Ke
ypad’s
 
POLICE
 
button
 
triggers
 
a
 
silent
 
alarm
 
if
 
programming
 
question
 
Q16:
 
Police
 
Emergency
 
Key
 
(0

2)
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(2)
 
Silent
 
Panic
.
 
See
 

Q16:
 
Police
 
Emergency
 
Ke
y
 
(0

2)”
 
on
 
page
 
53.
IMPORTANT:
To
 
ens
ure
 
that
 
a
 
signal
 
is
 
sent,
 
instruct
 
the
 
end
 
user
 
to
 
tap
 
and
 
hold
 
down
 
the
 
emergency
 
key
 
on
 
the
 
keypad
 
until
 
its
 
indicator
 
light
 
illuminates.
Q: Construct RF Keypad# Voice Descriptor
DEFAULT:
 
(#)
 
Ke
ypad
The
 
voice
 
descriptor
 
is
 
the
 
words
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
announce
 
for
 
this
 
RF
 
Keypad.
 
Up
 
to
 
five
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
1
Tap
 
Insert
 
to
 
place
 
a
 
word
 
from
 
the
 
vocabulary
 
into
 
the
 
data
 
entry
 
field.
2
Use
 
the
 ← 
or
 → 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
words,
 
or
 
enter
 
the
 
word’s
 
3

digit
 
index
 
number.
3
Tap
 
Insert
 
again
 
for
 
the
 
next
 
word.
 
Up
 
to
 
five
 
words
 
are
 
allowed.
4
To
 
remove
 
a
 
word,
 
tap
 
Delete
. 52
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Control Panel Programming
Programming Questions
Q1: RF Sensor Programming
To
 
learn
 
about
 
RF
 
sensor
 
programming,
 
see
 
"Wireless
 
(RF)
 
Sensor
 
Programming"
 
on
 
page
 
41
Q2: Wired Sensor Programming
To
 
learn
 
about
 
wired
 
sensor
 
programming,
 
see
 
"Wired
 
Sensor
 
Programming"
 
on
 
page
 
44
Q3: RF Key Fob Programming
To
 
learn
 
about
 
RF
 
key
 
fob
 
programming,
 
see
 
"Wireless
 
(RF)
 
Key
 
Fob
 
Programming"
 
on
 
page
 
47.
Q4: RF Keypad Programming
To
 
learn
 
about
 
RF
 
keypad
 
programming,
 
see
 
"Wireless
 
(RF)
 
Keypad
 
Programming"
 
on
 
page
 
49
Q5: Exit Delay, in Seconds (45-120)
DEFAULT:
 
60
 
seconds
The
 
default
 
minimum
 
setting
 
of
 
60
 
seconds
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
 
The
 
delay
 
time
 
can
 
be
 
increased
 
without
 
affecting
 
compliance.
The
 
exit
 
delay
 
timer
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
45
 
to
 
120
 
seconds.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
60
 
sets
 
the
 
exit
 
delay
 
to
 
60
 
seconds.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
exit
 
delay
 
timer,
 
enter
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
45

120
 
seconds.
Q6: Entry Delay 1, in Seconds (30-240)
DEFAULT:
 
30
 
seconds
The
 
default
 
minimum
 
setting
 
of
 
30
 
seconds
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
 
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
compliance
 
with
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01,
 
the
 
total
 
number
 
of
 
minutes
 
for
 
the
 
combination
 
of
 
Q6:
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1
 
and
 
Q35:
 
Abort
 
Window
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
cannot
 
exceed
 
one
 
(1)
 
minute.
The
 
ti

mer
 
for
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
30
 
to
 
240
 
seconds.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
30
 
sets
 
the
 
timer
 
to
 
30
 
seconds.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
setting,
 
enter
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
30

240
 
seconds.
Q7: Entry Delay 2, in Seconds (30-240)
DEFAULT:
 
45
 
seconds
The
 
default
 
minimum
 
setting
 
of
 
45
 
seconds
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
 
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
compliance
 
with
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01,
 
the
 
total
 
number
 
of
 
minutes
 
for
 
the
 
combination
 
of
 
Q7:
 
and
 
Q35:
 
Abort
 
Window
 
Dialer
 
Delay
 
cannot
 
exceed
 
one
 
(1)
 
minute.
 
The
 
ti

mer
 
for
 
Entry
 
Delay
 
1
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
30

240
 
seconds:
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
of
 
45
 
sets
 
the
 
timer
 
to
 
45
 
seconds.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
timer
 
setting,
 
enter
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
30

240
 
seconds.
Q8: Dialer (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
dialer
 
(digital
 
communicator)
 
can
 
be
 
enabled
 
for
 
a
 
monitored
 
system
 
or
 
disabled
 
for
 
a
 
local
 
alarm
 
or
 
when
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
used
 
exclusively
 
for
 
reporting.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
turns
 
the
 
dialer
 
OFF.
•To
 
tu

rn
 
the
 
dialer
 
ON,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
IMPORTANT:
If
 
(0
)
 
Disabled
 
is
 
selected
 
in
 
Q8:
 
Dialer
,
 
telephone
 
line
 
failure
 
detection
 
is
 
also
 
disabled
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
setting
 
specified
 
in
 
Q63:
 
Phone
 
Fail
 
Detect
.
Q9: Dialing Prefix (0-4 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
Default
Some
 
telephone
 
PBX
 
systems
 
require
 
a
 
dialing
 
prefix
 
to
 
acquire
 
a
 
dial
 
tone.
•If
 
the
 
te

lephone
 
system
 
that
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
connected
 
to
 
requires
 
a
 
dialing
 
prefix,
 
enter
 
up
 
to
 
four
 
(4)
 
digits.
•Tap
 
Sh

ift
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
pound
 
(#)
 
and
 
star
 
(*)
 
symbols.
 
The
 
P
 
button
 
adds
 
a
 
three
 
(3)

second
 
pause
 
to
 
the
 
dialing.
Q10: Call Waiting Disable Code (0-6
Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
default
For
 
ANSI/SIA
 
compliance,
 
do
 
not
 
enter
 
a
 
disable
 
code.
If
 
the
 
subscriber’s
 
telephone
 
line
 
has
 
call
 
waiting,
 
incoming
 
call
 
tones
 
on
 
the
 
line
 
can
 
interfere
 
with
 
reports
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
To
 
prevent
 
this,
 
the
 
system
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
to
 
enter
 
the
 
code
 
to
 
deactivate
 
call
 
waiting
 
before
 
sending
 
a
 
re
port
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station:
•If
 
ca

ll
 
waiting
 
is
 
active
 
on
 
the
 
telephone
 
line,
 
enter
 
the
 
code
 
to
 
deactivate
 
call
 
waiting.
•Tap
 
Sh

ift
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
pound
 
(#)
 
and
 
star
 
(*)
 
symbols.
 
The
 
P
 
button
 
adds
 
a
 
three
 
(3)

second
 
pause
 
to
 
the
 
dialing.
NOTE:
If
 
th

e
 
first
 
attempt
 
fails,
 
this
 
code
 
will
 
be
 
ignored
 
on
 
the
 
rest
 
of
 
the
 
attempts. Control Panel Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
53
Q11: CS #1 Phone Nu
mber (0-25 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
Default
Enter
 
the
 
telephone
 
number
 
for
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
#1.
 
You
 
can
 
enter
 
up
 
to
 
25
 
digits.
•Enter
 
th

e
 
Central
 
Station
 
#1
 
telephone
 
number.
•Tap
 
Shi

ft
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
pound
 
(#)
 
and
 
star
 
(*)
 
symbols.
 
The
 
P
 
button
 
adds
 
a
 
three
 
(3)

second
 
pause
 
to
 
the
 
dialing.
NOTE:
If
 
a
 
se
cond
 
Central
 
Station
 
telephone
 
number
 
is
 
programmed
 
with
 
question
 
Q41:
 
CS
 
#2
 
Account
 
Number
,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
alternates
 
between
 
the
 
two
 
Central
 
Station
 
telephone
 
numbers.
 
After
 
two
 
failed
 
telephone
 
dialing
 
attempts,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
attempts
 
to
 
connect
 
using
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
if
 
it
 
is
 
installed.
 
If
 
the
 
GSM
 
(

Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
not
 
installed,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
make
 
eight
 
(8)
 
dialing
 
attempts.
Q12: CS #1 Account Number (4 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
Default
Enter
 
the
 
account
 
number
 
for
 
Central
 
Station
 
#1.
 
This
 
number
 
is
 
always
 
four
 
(4)
 
digits
 
and
 
can
 
include
 
some
 
alpha
 
characters.
•Enter
 
th

e
 
four
 
(4)
 
digit
 
for
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
#1
 
account
 
number.
•Tap
 
Shi

ft
 
to
 
gain
 
access
 
to
 
these
 
characters:
 
B,
 
C,
 
D,
 
E,
 
and
 
F.
Q13: 2-Way Voice (0-2)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Stay
 
On
 
Line
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
supports
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
voice
 
communications
 
between
 
the
 
subscriber
 
and
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
operator
 
over
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
or
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
(if
 
installed)
 
after
 
an
 
alarm
 
has
 
been
 
reported.
•The
 
(1)
 
St
ay
 
On
 
Line
 
allows
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
audio
 
over
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
or
 
cell
 
radio.
• Selecting
 
(2)
 
St
ay
 
On
 
Line,
 
Including
 
Fire
 
and
 
CO
 
Alarms
 
allows
 
2

way
 
audio
 
over
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
or
 
cell
 
radio
 
during
 
fire
 
and
 
CO
 
alarms.
•To
 
turn
 
of
f
 
the
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
audio
 
feature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
When
 
the
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
connects
 
with
 
the
 
operator,
 
it
 
will
 
beep
 
once
 
per
 
second
 
(every
 
6
 
seconds
 
with
 
a
 
cell
 
radio
 
connection).
 
The
 
beep
 
alternates
 
between
 
two
 
tones
 
and
 
indicates
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
waiting
 
for
 
a
 
session
 
command.
 
If
 
the
 
operator
 
fails
 
to
 
issue
 
a
 
command
 
within
 
one
 
(1)
 
minute
 
(or
 
thr

ee
 
(3)
 
minutes
 
if
 
using
 
the
 
cell
 
radio
 
connection),
 
the
 
call
 
is
 
terminated.
 
Once
 
the
 
operator
 
presses
 
a
 
command
 
option,
 
the
 
beeps
 
will
 
stop
 
and
 
a
 
five
 
(5)

minute
 
audio
 
session
 
will
 
start
 
(or
 
three
 
(3)

minute
 
audio
 
session
 
if
 
using
 
the
 
cell
 
radio
 
connection).
When
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
voice
 
co
mmunications
 
have
 
been
 
established,
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
operator
 
can
 
use
 
the
 
following
 
telephone
 
keys
 
to
 
control
 
the
 
communications.
 
Each
 
time
 
the
 
operator
 
uses
 
a
 
command
 
key,
 
the
 
session
 
is
 
extended
 
for
 
five
 
additional
 
minutes
 
(three
 
minutes
 
with
 
a
 
cell
 
radio
 
connection).
 
During
 
the
 
last
 
minute
 
of
 
communications,
 
the
 
system
 
beeps
 
two
 
(2)
 
time

s
 
every
 
15
 
seconds
 
to
 
indicate
 
that
 
time
 
is
 
running
 
out.
•Tap
 
1
 
to
 
en
able
 
Talk
 
mode
 
one
 
(1)

way
 
communication
 
from
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
to
 
the
 
premises
 
and
 
allows
 
the
 
operator
 
to
 
talk.
•Tap
 
2
 
to
 
en
able
 
VOX
 
mode
 
two
 
(2)

way
 
communications
 
from
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
to
 
the
 
premises.
•Tap
 
3
 
to
 
en
able
 
Listen
 
mode
 
one
 
(1)

way
 
communication
 
from
 
the
 
premises
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
•Tap
 
7
 
to
 
ex
tend
 
the
 
session
 
five
 
(5)
 
minutes
 
without
 
changing
 
the
 
mode
 
of
 
operation.
•Tap
 
9
 
to
 
en
d
 
the
 
audio
 
session
 
an
 
terminate
 
the
 
call.
Q14: Silent Panic/B
urglary Listen Only
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
supports
 
audio
 
listen

in
 
of
 
the
 
subscriber
 
premises
 
from
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
over
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
after
 
a
 
silent
 
panic
 
(police
 
emergency),
 
silent
 
burglary,
 
or
 
duress
 
alarm
 
has
 
been
 
reported.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
to
 
use
 
listen

in
 
over
 
audio
 
after
 
a
 
silent
 
panic,
 
silent
 
burglary,
 
or
 
duress
 
alarm.
•This
 
opt

ion
 
is
 
permanently
 
set
 
and
 
cannot
 
be
 
disabled.
Q15: Dialing Type (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Touch
 
Tone
The
 
digital
 
communicator
 
uses
 
tones
 
or
 
pulses.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Touch
 
Tone
 
is
 
for
 
Dual

Tone
 
Multi

Frequency
 
(DTMF)
 
dialing.
•For
 
ro

tary
 
dialing,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Pulse
.
Q16: Police Emergency Key (0-2)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Audible
The
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
panic
 
emergency
 
button
 
action
 
can
 
be
 
programmed.
 
The
 
panic
 
emergency
 
button
 
is
 
displayed
 
by
 
pressing
 
the
  
button.
•The
 
de

fault
 
(1)
 
Audible
 
allows
 
the
 
panic
 
emergency
 
button
 
to
 
sound
 
an
 
audible
 
alarm.
•For
 
si

lent
 
activation,
 
select
 
(2)
 
Silent
 
Panic
.
•To
 
dis

able
 
and
 
not
 
display
 
the
 
panic
 
emergency
 
button,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
Set

ting
 
this
 
programming
 
question
 
for
 
(2)
 
Silent
 
Panic
 
makes
 
the
 
Police
 
button
 
on
 
all
 
RF
 
keypads
 
silent
 
also.
Q17: Fire Emergency Key (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Audible
The
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
fire
 
emergency
 
button
 
can
 
be
 
enabled
 
or
 
disabled.
 
The
 
fire
 
emergency
 
button
 
is
 
displayed
 
by
 
pressing
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
  
button.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Audible
 
allows
 
the
 
fire
 
emergency
 
button
 
to
 
sound
 
an
 
audible
 
alarm. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
54
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
•To
 
disable
 
and
 
not
 
display
 
the
 
fire
 
emergency
 
button,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q18: Emergency Key (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Audible
The
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
emergency
 
button
 
can
 
be
 
enabled
 
or
 
disabled.
 
The
 
panel’s
 
emergency
 
button
 
is
 
displayed
 
by
 
pressing
 
the
 
Emergency
  
button
 
on
 
the
 
panel.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Audible
 
sounds
 
an
 
audible
 
alarm
 
when
 
the
 
button
 
is
 
pressed.
•To
 
disab

le
 
this
 
button,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
If
 
all
 
thr
ee
 
(3)
 
Emergency
 
buttons
 
are
 
disabled,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
displays
 
a
 
message
 
when
 
its
 
Emergency
 
 
button
 
is
 
pressed.
Q19: Quick Arming (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Quick
 
arming
 
allows
 
the
 
subscriber
 
to
 
arm
 
the
 
system
 
without
 
having
 
to
 
enter
 
a
 
user
 
code.
 
If
 
Open/Close
 
Reports
 
are
 
being
 
sent,
 
quick
 
arming
 
is
 
reported
 
as
 
User
 
0
.
•The
 
de

fault
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
quick
 
arming.
•To
 
turn
 
of
f
 
quick
 
arming,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q20: Swinger Shut
down Count (1-6)
DEFAULT:
 
(2)
 
Two
 
Trips
The
 
minimum
 
setting
 
of
 
(2)
 
Two
 
Trips
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
ANSI/
SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
 
This
 
default
 
setting
 
can
 
be
 
increased
 
to
 
three
 
or
 
more
 
trips
 
without
 
affecting
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance
.
An
 
unwanted
 
series
 
of
 
multiple
 
faults
 
(usually
 
caused
 
by
 
a
 
bad
 
contact
 
or
 
sensor)
 
is
 
called
 
a
 
“s
winger.”
 
Swinger
 
shutdown
 
sets
 
the
 
maximum
 
number
 
of
 
alarms
 
that
 
any
 
sensor
 
or
 
hardwire
 
loop
 
can
 
trigger
 
during
 
a
 
single
 
arming
 
period.
NOTE:
CO
 
an
d
 
Smoke
 
detector
 
alarms
 
are
 
not
 
limited
 
by
 
the
 
swinger
 
shutdown
 
count.
 
Other
 
types
 
of
 
24

hour
 
zones
 
are
 
limited
 
by
 
the
 
swinger
 
shutdown
 
count.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(2)
 
Two

Trips
 
sets
 
the
 
swinger
 
shutdown
 
count
 
at
 
two
 
(2)
 
trips.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
this
 
count,
 
select
 
(1

6)
.
Q21: Siren Supervi
sion Time (0-3)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
wiring
 
connection
 
to
 
the
 
external
 
sounder
 
can
 
be
 
supervised.
 
If
 
the
 
wiring
 
to
 
the
 
sounder
 
is
 
cut
 
for
 
15,
 
30,
 
or
 
45
 
seconds,
 
a
 
bell
 
trouble
 
report
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
turns
 
external
 
sounder
 
supervision
 
OFF.
•To
 
su

pervise
 
the
 
external
 
sounder
 
wiring,
 
select:
•(1)
 
15
 
Sec
onds
•(2)
 
30
 
Sec
onds

(3)
 
45
 
Sec
onds
Q22: CS Lack of Usage Notification Time
(0-255)
DEFAULT:
 
7
 
days
If
 
this
 
system
 
has
 
not
 
been
 
armed
 
for
 
a
 
specified
 
number
 
of
 
days,
 
inactivity
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
7
 
days.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
duration,
 
select
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
1
 
to
 
255
 
days.
•To
 
turn
 
th
is
 
feature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
0
 
days.
Q23: Radio Modem Network Failure Time
(0-255)
DEFAULT:
 
30
 
Minutes
NOTE:
GSM
 
(Ce
llular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
to
 
use
 
this
 
function.
If
 
the
 
optio

nal
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
loses
 
its
 
cellular
 
connection,
 
specify
 
the
 
amount
 
of
 
down
 
time
 
that
 
must
 
pass
 
before
 
triggering
 
a
 
trouble
 
condition.
 
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
30
 
minutes.
•To
 
sp

ecify
 
a
 
different
 
amount
 
of
 
time,
 
enter
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
one
 
(
1
)
 
to
 
255
 
minutes.
•To
 
turn
 
th
is
 
feature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
0
 
minutes.
NOTE:
Aft

er
 
cellular
 
service
 
is
 
restored
 
for
 
five
 
(5)
 
minutes,
 
the
 
trouble
 
condition
 
automatically
 
clears.
Q24: Radio Modem Network Failure
Causes Trouble (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
NOTE:
GSM
 
(Ce
llular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
to
 
use
 
this
 
function.
Selects
 
whether
 
the
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
will
 
sound
 
and
 
display
 
trouble
 
if
 
the
 
optional
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
has
 
lost
 
its
 
cellular
 
connection.
 
The
 
trouble
 
sounder
 
can
 
be
 
silenced
 
by
 
the
 
user
 
at
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
(cell
 
radio
 
trouble
 
is
 
logged
 
regardless
 
of
 
this
 
setting).
 
When
 
the
 
cellular
 
radio
 
module
 
connection
 
is
 
rest
ored,
 
the
 
trouble
 
indications
 
automatically
 
clear.
•The
 
de

fault
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
radio
 
module
 
failure
 
trouble
 
indications.
•To
 
turn
 
off
 
ra
dio
 
module
 
failure
 
trouble
 
indications,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q25: Radio Modem Network Failure
Reports (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
NOTE:
GSM
 
(Ce
llular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
to
 
use
 
this
 
function.
If
 
the
 
optio

nal
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
loses
 
its
 
cellular
 
connection,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
report
 
the
 
fault
 
and
 
restore
 
via
 
land

line
 
if
 
telephone
 
reporting
 
is
 
enabled.
•The
 
de

fault
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
radio
 
module
 
failure/
restore
 
reporting.
•To
 
turn
 
off
 
ra
dio
 
module
 
failure/restore
 
reporting,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q26: Auto Stay (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
This
 
feature
 
must
 
be
 
enabled
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance Control Panel Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
55
When
 
auto
 
stay
 
is
 
enabled
 
and
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
in
 
the
 
Away
 
mode,
 
if
 
an
 
exit/
 
entry
 
sensor
 
is
 
not
 
violated
 
during
 
the
 
Exit
 
Delay,
 
the
 
system
 
will
 
arm
 
in
 
the
 
Stay
 
mode.
•The
 
default
 
setting
 
is
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
which
 
turns
 
the
 
auto

stay
 
feature
 
ON.
•To
 
turn
 
this
 
fe
ature
 
off,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
If
 
the
 
sy
stem
 
is
 
remotely
 
armed
 
in
 
Away
 
mode
 
using
 
a
 
key
 
fob,
 
telephone,
 
mobile
 
app,
 
or
 
computer,
 
the
 
auto

stay
 
feature
 
will
 
not
 
switch
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
Stay
 
mode.
Q27: Exit Delay Restart (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
This
 
feature
 
must
 
be
 
enabled
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
When
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
restart
 
is
 
enabled,
 
re

entering
 
the
 
premises
 
through
 
an
 
exit/
 
entry
 
door
 
during
 
the
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
will
 
restart
 
the
 
Exit
 
Delay.
 
The
 
restart
 
of
 
the
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
will
 
only
 
occur
 
one
 
time;
 
further
 
violations
 
of
 
an
 
ex
it/entry
 
sensor
 
will
 
not
 
extend
 
the
 
Exit
 
Delay.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
turns
 
this
 
feature
 
ON.
•To
 
turn
 
this
 
fe
ature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q28: Quick Exit (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
The
 
quick
 
exit
 
feature
 
allows
 
the
 
user
 
to
 
start
 
the
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
while
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed.
 
When
 
this
 
feature
 
is
 
enabled,
 
a
 
Quick
 
Exit
 
button
 
appears
 
on
 
the
 
Security
 
screen.
 
Tap
 
Quick
 
Exit
 
while
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
when
 
the
 
user
 
wants
 
to
 
leave
 
through
 
an
 
exit/entry
 
door.
 
Af

ter
 
the
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
expires,
 
the
 
system
 
will
 
return
 
to
 
being
 
armed
 
in
 
the
 
mode
 
it
 
was
 
in
 
before
 
(either
 
Stay
 
or
 
Away
 
mode).
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
turns
 
this
 
feature
 
ON.
•To
 
turn
 
this
 
fe
ature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q29: Periodic Test, in Days (0-255)
DEFAULT:
 
30
 
Days
 
Recurring
 
test
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
automatically
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
at
 
a
 
specified
 
number
 
of
 
days.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
30
.
 
This
 
sends
 
an
 
automatic
 
test
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
every
 
30
 
days.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
number
 
of
 
days,
 
enter
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
one
 
(1)
 
to
 
255
 
days.
•To
 
disab

le
 
this
 
feature,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q31: Cancel Time, in Minutes (5-255)
DEFAULT:
 
5
 
minutes
The
 
minimum
 
setting
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance
 
is
 
5
 
minutes.
 
The
 
number
 
of
 
minutes
 
can
 
be
 
increased
 
without
 
affecting
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
A
 
cancel
 
report
 
will
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
after
 
an
 
alarm,
 
if
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed
 
within
 
the
 
programmed
 
time.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
for
 
the
 
cancellation
 
time
 
is
 
five
 
(5)
 
minutes.
•To
 
ex

tend
 
this
 
time
 
interval,
 
enter
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
six
 
(6)
 
to
 
254
 
minutes.
•To
 
alw

ays
 
send
 
a
 
cancel
 
report
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed
 
after
 
an
 
alarm,
 
enter
 
255.
NOTE:
See
 
Q32:
 
Can
cel
 
Display
 
for
 
information
 
on
 
displaying
 
when
 
a
 
cancel
 
report
 
is
 
sent.
Q32: Cancel Display (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
This
 
feature
 
must
 
be
 
enabled
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
A
 
cancel
 
report
 
will
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
after
 
an
 
alarm,
 
if
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed
 
within
 
the
 
programmed
 
time.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
also
 
display
 
that
 
a
 
cancel
 
report
 
was
 
sent.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
enables
 
the
 
cancel
 
display
 
feature.
•To
 
tu

rn
 
off
 
the
 
cancel
 
display
 
feature,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
See
 
Q31:
 
Canc
el
 
Time,
 
in
 
Minutes
 
for
 
information
 
on
 
setting
 
the
 
cancel
 
report
 
trigger
 
time.
Q33: Cross Sensor 47-48 (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
so
 
sensors
 
47
 
and
 
48
 
must
 
both
 
be
 
violated
 
during
 
a
 
set
 
time
 
to
 
trigger
 
an
 
alarm.
 
This
 
is
 
called
 
“cross
 
sensor”
 
verification.
 
When
 
enabled,
 
if
 
only
 
one
 
sensor
 
(47or
 
48)
 
is
 
violated,
 
the
 
alarm
 
will
 
not
 
trigger,
 
but
 
a
 
trouble
 
report
 
will
 
be
 
se

nt
 
for
 
the
 
sensor
 
that
 
triggered.
NOTE:
CO
 
an
d
 
Fire
 
zone
 
cannot
 
be
 
used
 
for
 
cross
 
sensors.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
turns
 
the
 
cross
 
sensor
 
feature
 
OFF.
•To
 
tu

rn
 
the
 
cross
 
sensor
 
feature
 
ON,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
NOTE:
See
 
Q34:
 
Cr
oss
 
Sensor
 
Timeout,
 
in
 
Seconds
 
for
 
information
 
on
 
setting
 
the
 
cross
 
sensor
 
timeout.
Q34: Cross Sensor Timeout, in Seconds
(10-120)
DEFAULT:
 
10
 
Seconds
The
 
cross
 
sensor
 
timeout
 
is
 
the
 
maximum
 
period
 
of
 
time
 
allowed
 
between
 
violation
 
of
 
sensors
 
47
 
and
 
48
 
that
 
will
 
trigger
 
an
 
alarm.
 
If
 
both
 
sensors
 
are
 
violated
 
within
 
this
 
time
 
period,
 
an
 
alarm
 
will
 
be
 
triggered.
 
If
 
both
 
sensors
 
are
 
not
 
violated
 
within
 
this
 
time
 
period,
 
an
 
alarm
 
wi

ll
 
not
 
be
 
triggered.
NOTE:
Cr

oss
 
sensor
 
verification
 
must
 
be
 
enabled
 
with
 
Q33:
 
Cross
 
Se

nsor
 
47

48
 
for
 
this
 
feature
 
to
 
function.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
for
 
the
 
cross
 
sensor
 
timeout
 
is
 
10
 
seconds. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
56
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
•To
 
change
 
the
 
timeout
 
duration,
 
enter
 
a
 
valued
 
between
 
11
 
to
 
120
 
seconds.
Q35: Abort Window
Dialer Delay (0-2)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
30
 
Seconds
The
 
default
 
minimum
 
setting
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance
 
is
 
30
 
seconds.
 
The
 
delay
 
time
 
can
 
be
 
increased
 
to
 
45
 
seconds
 
without
 
affecting
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance
 
only
 
if
 
the
 
combination
 
of
 
Q35
 
and
 
Q6
 
or
 
Q7
 
does
 
not
 
exceed
 
one
 
(1)
 
minute.
NOTE:
The
 
dialer
 
de
lay
 
can
 
be
 
disabled
 
for
 
each
 
sensor
 
without
 
affecting
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
compliance.
 
See
 
"RF
 
Sensor
 
Progr
amming
 
Questions"
 
on
 
page
 
42.
The
 
dialer
 
(dig
ital
 
communicator)
 
delays
 
calling
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
to
 
allow
 
the
 
user
 
enough
 
time
 
to
 
cancel
 
a
 
false
 
alarm
 
before
 
it
 
is
 
reported.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
(1)
 
30
 
Seconds
.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
setting,
 
select
 
(0)
 
15
 
Seconds
 
or
 
(2)
 
45
 
Seconds
.
Q36: Burglary Bell Cutoff (0 to 4)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
4
 
Minutes
 
When
 
a
 
burglary
 
alarm
 
is
 
triggered,
 
the
 
bell
 
will
 
sound
 
until
 
the
 
burglary
 
bell
 
cutoff
 
time
 
expires.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
for
 
the
 
burglary
 
bell
 
cutoff
 
is
 
(0)
 
4
 
Minutes
.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
cutoff
 
time,
 
select
 
an
 
option
 
below.
Burglary
 
Bell
 
Cutoff
 
Time
(0)
 
4
 
Minutes
(1)
 
8
 
Minutes
(2)
 
12
 
Minutes
(3)
 
16
 
Minutes
(4)
 
Unlimited
NOTE:
The
 
24

hour
 
Auxiliary
 
Alarm
 
Zone
 
(08)
 
does
 
not
 
follow
 
the
 
burglary
 
bell
 
cutoff
 
time
 
and
 
will
 
sound
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
local
 
alarm
 
until
 
a
 
User
 
Code
 
is
 
entered.
 
The
 
Auxiliary
 
Alarm
 
Zone
 
does
 
not
 
trigger
 
the
 
external
 
siren
 
(if
 
used).
Q37: Fire Bell Cutoff (0-4)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
4
 
Minutes
When
 
a
 
fire
 
alarm
 
is
 
triggered,
 
the
 
bell
 
sounds
 
until
 
the
 
fire
 
bell
 
cutoff
 
time
 
expires.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
4
 
Minutes
 
sets
 
the
 
burglary
 
bell
 
cutoff
 
to
 
four
 
(4)
 
minutes.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
fire
 
bell
 
cutoff
 
time,
 
select
 
an
 
option
 
below
Fire
 
Bell
 
Cutoff
 
Time
(0)
 
4
 
minutes
(1)
 
8
 
minutes
(2)
 
12
 
minutes
(3)
 
16
 
minutes
(4)
 
Unlimited
Q38: Time to Detect AC Loss, in Minutes
(0-30)
DEFAULT:
 
(10)
 
10
 
Minutes
When
 
AC
 
power
 
is
 
lost,
 
they
 
system
 
displays
 
a
 
power
 
loss
 
alert
  
after
 
the
 
specified
 
time
 
length.
 
When
 
power
 
is
 
restored,
 
the
 
alert
 
is
 
automatically
 
cleared
 
after
 
one
 
(1)
 
minute.
•The
 
de

fault
 
detection
 
timer
 
for
 
displaying
 
the
 
alert
 
message
 
is
 
(10)
 
10
 
Minutes
.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
detection
 
timer,
 
enter
 
a
 
value
 
between
 
0
 
to
 
30
 
minutes.
NOTE:
Aft

er
 
the
 
AC
 
power
 
alert
 
 
is
 
displayed
 
or
 
clears,
 
the
 
AC
 
pow

er
 
loss
 
report
 
or
 
AC
 
power
 
restore
 
report
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
immediately,
 
or
 
at
 
a
 
random
 
time,
 
see
 
Q39:
 
Random
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Report
 
Time
.
NOTE:
The
 
Con
trol
 
Panel’s
 
AC
 
Power
 
Icon
 
immediately
 
displays
 
the
 
power
 
status.
 
See
 
“A

C
 
Power
 
On/OFF”
 
on
 
page
 
28.
Q39: Random AC Loss Report Time (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
This
 
feature
 
allows
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
report
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
and
 
AC
 
power
 
restore
 
at
 
a
 
random
 
time
 
of
 
up
 
to
 
45
 
minutes
 
after
 
the
 
event
 
occurs.
 
This
 
helps
 
to
 
reduce
 
Central
 
Station
 
congestion
 
due
 
to
 
a
 
wide

spread
 
power
 
outage
 
affecting
 
many
 
Control
 
Panels
 
at
 
once.
 
The
 
random
 
AC
 
po
wer
 
status
 
report
 
timer
 
is
 
triggered
 
based
 
on
 
the
 
time
 
set
 
by
 
Q38:
 
Random
 
AC
 
Loss
 
Report
 
Time
.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
turns
 
this
 
feature
 
ON.
 
•To
 
tu

rn
 
this
 
feature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q40: CS #2 Phone
Number (0-25 digits)
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
Default
The
 
telephone
 
number
 
for
 
Central
 
Station
 
#2
 
can
 
be
 
up
 
to
 
25
 
digits.
 
Central
 
Station
 
telephone
 
#2
 
is
 
dialed
 
as
 
backup
 
in
 
case
 
telephone
 
#1
 
does
 
not
 
connect.
•Enter
 
the
 
Cen
tral
 
Station
 
#2
 
telephone
 
number.
•Tap
 
Sh

ift
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
pound
 
(#)
 
and
 
star
 
(*)
 
symbols.
 
The
 
P
 
button
 
adds
 
a
 
3

second
 
pause
 
to
 
the
 
dialing.
Q41: CS #2 Account Number (4 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
No
 
Default
The
 
account
 
number
 
for
 
Central
 
Station
 
#2
 
is
 
always
 
four
 
digits
 
and
 
can
 
include
 
some
 
alpha
 
characters.
•Enter
 
fo

ur
 
(4)
 
digits
 
for
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
#2
 
account
 
number.
•The
 
Shift
 
b
utton
 
accesses
 
B,
 
C,
 
D,
 
E,
 
and
 
F
 
characters.
Q42: Remote Control Phone (0-3)
DEFAULT:
 
(3)
 
Data
 
and
 
Voice
This
 
setting
 
controls
 
remote
 
telephone
 
access
 
to
 
the
 
system.
  Control Panel Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
57

The
 
data
 
option
 
is
 
for
 
the
 
installer
.
 
It
 
allows
 
access
 
for
 
programming
 
and
 
operating
 
the
 
system
 
with
 
custom
 
PC
 
downloader
 
software.

The
 
vo

ice
 
option
 
is
 
for
 
the
 
subscriber
.
 
It
 
allows
 
the
 
subscriber
 
to
 
call
 
the
 
system
 
from
 
an
 
off

site
 
phone,
 
to
 
get
 
the
 
status
 
of
 
the
 
system,
 
and
 
to
 
perform
 
remote
 
commands.
 
These
 
commands
 
are
 
executed
 
by
 
entering
 
touch
 
tones.
 
The
 
status
 
is
 
reported
 
back
 
via
 
voice
 
prompts.
 
A
 
valid
 
Us
er
 
Code
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
remote
 
telephone
 
access.
 
The
 
user
 
can
 
perform
 
the
 
following
 
functions:
 
arm
 
in
 
any
 
mode,
 
disarm,
 
bypass,
 
get
 
system
 
status,
 
and
 
turn
 
on
 
or
 
turn
 
off
 
the
 
open
 
collector
 
output.
If
 
vo
ice
 
access
 
is
 
enabled,
 
to
 
connect
 
to
 
the
 
panel,
 
the
 
subscriber
 
will
 
need
 
to
 
call
 
the
 
telephone
 
number
 
that
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
connected
 
to,
 
wait
 
for
 
one
 
or
 
two
 
rings,
 
then
 
hang
 
up.
 
The
 
subscriber
 
needs
 
to
 
call
 
again,
 
within
 
10

45
 
seconds.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
answers
 
the
 
call.
When
 
the
 
pa
nel
 
answers
 
the
 
phone,
 
the
 
user
 
will
 
be
 
prompted
 
to
 
enter
 
their
 
code.
 
If
 
a
 
valid
 
code
 
is
 
entered,
 
the
 
system
 
will
 
announce
 
the
 
current
 
system
 
status.
 
If
 
an
 
invalid
 
code
 
is
 
entered,
 
the
 
panel
 
will
 
ask
 
for
 
the
 
code
 
again.
 
After
 
two
 
invalid
 
attempts,
 
the
 
panel
 
will
 
disconnect.
 
Af
ter
 
two
 
calls,
 
with
 
two
 
invalid
 
attempts
 
each,
 
the
 
panel
 
will
 
lock
 
out.
 
The
 
lock
 
out
 
will
 
last
 
for
 
30
 
minutes.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
(3)
 
Data
 
and
 
Voice
.
•To
 
us

e
 
data
 
access
 
only,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Data
 
Only
.
•To
 
us

e
 
voice
 
access
 
only,
 
select
 
(2)
 
Voice
 
Only
.
•To
 
turn
 
the
 
re
mote
 
access
 
feature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
Remotely
 
arming
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
Away
 
mode
 
will
 
not
 
start
 
an
 
Exit
 
Delay
 
or
 
activate
 
Auto
 
Stay
 
mode
 
(if
 
enabled).
Q43: Installer Code (4 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
1561
The
 
installer
 
code
 
is
 
a
 
unique
 
code
 
that
 
installation
 
technicians
 
use
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
•The
 
de

fault
 
installer
 
code
 
is
 
1561
.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
installer
 
code,
 
enter
 
a
 
new
 
four
 
(4)

digit
 
code.
IMPORTANT:
If
 
yo
u
 
change
 
the
 
installer
 
code,
 
always
 
write
 
it
 
down
 
so
 
that
 
you
 
can
 
access
 
the
 
system
 
later.
NOTE:
The
 
ins
taller
 
code
 
must
 
be
 
unique
 
from
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
and
 
all
 
other
 
user
 
codes.
Q44: Lock Installe
r Programming (0-2)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
The
 
installer
 
programming
 
lockout
 
feature
 
is
 
provided
 
to
 
prevent
 
takeovers.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
limit
 
an
 
installer’s
 
access
 
to
 
programming
 
questions
 
after
 
a
 
period
 
of
 
48
 
hours.
 
The
 
48

Hour
 
Lockout
 
timer
 
starts
 
when
 
the
 
installer
 
exits
 
System
 
Configuration
 
mode.
 
Three
 
(3)
 
options
 
are
 
available:
• Unlimited
 
full
 
acce
ss
 
to
 
programming
 
(no
 
lockout)
• Limited
 
acce
ss
 
to
 
programming
 
after
 
48
 
hours
•No
 
ac

cess
 
to
 
programming
 
after
 
48
 
hours
The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
selects
 
unlimited
 
full
 
access
 
to
 
programming
 
(no
 
lockout).
To
 
deny
 
access
 
to
 
programming
 
after
 
48
 
hours,
 
select
 
(1)
 
No
 
Access
 
to
 
Programming
.
If
 
you
 
select
 
(2)
 
Limited
 
Access
 
to
 
Programming
 
the
 
installer
 
will
 
be
 
able
 
to
 
view,
 
but
 
not
 
change
 
the
 
following
 
attributes
 
after
 
the
 
system
 
has
 
run
 
fo

r
 
48
 
hours,
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
phone
 
number,
 
Central
 
Station
 
account
 
number,
 
lock
 
installer
 
programming,
 
download
 
ID,
 
and
 
default
 
lockout
 
fields.
After
 
the
 
48
 
hour
 
lockout
 
timer
 
has
 
locked
 
out
 
the
 
system,
 
the
 
timer
 
can
 
be
 
reset
 
through
 
the
 
cell
 
radio
 
or
 
PC
 
download
 
by
 
remotely
 
setting
 
this
 
question
 
to
 
(0)
 
or
 
(2).
 
Set
ting
 
the
 
option
 
to
 
(0)
 
or
 
(2)
 
will
 
restart
 
the
 
48
 
hour
 
lockout
 
timer.
Q45: Lock Default
Programming (0-2)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Default
 
All
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
may
 
be
 
able
 
to
 
be
 
hard
 
reset
 
(or
 
soft
 
reset
 
from
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox)
 
to
 
its
 
factory
 
default
 
values
 
depending
 
on
 
the
 
value
 
entered
 
for
 
this
 
programming
 
question.
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
is
 
hard
 
reset
 
by
 
pressing
 
and
 
holding
 
the
 
 
and
  
buttons
 
while
 
applying
 
power
 
to
 
the
 
Co

ntrol
 
Panel.
The
 
default
 
lockout
 
feature
 
is
 
provided
 
to
 
prevent
 
takeovers.
 
Three
 
options
 
are
 
available:
 
allow
 
default
 
of
 
all
 
options,
 
allow
 
default
 
of
 
some
 
but
 
not
 
all
 
options,
 
not
 
allow
 
default
 
of
 
any
 
options.
•The
 
def

ault
 
setting
 
of
 
(0)
 
Default
 
All
 
allows
 
resetting
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
to
 
all
 
its
 
factory
 
defaults.
•To
 
allo

w
 
resetting
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
to
 
all
 
its
 
factory
 
defaults
 
except
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
phone
 
number,
 
Central
 
Station
 
account
 
number,
 
lock
 
installer
 
programming,
 
download
 
ID,
 
and
 
default
 
lockout
 
fields,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Default
 
All
 
Except
 
CSID,
 
Account/
Phone,
 
Lockouts
.
•To
 
den

y
 
hard
 
and
 
soft
 
resetting
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
select
 
(2)
 
Default
 
None
.
If
 
option
 
1
 
or
 
2
 
is
 
selected,
 
the
 
option
 
takes
 
effect
 
after
 
the
 
system
 
runs
 
for
 
48
 
hours.
 
This
 
allows
 
the
 
installer
 
to
 
go
 
back
 
and
 
make
 
changes
 
if
 
required.
Telephone
 
Key
Remote
 
Control
 
Phone
 
Mode
1
System
 
status
 
report
2
Arm
 
the
 
system
 
in
 
Away
 
mode
3
Arm
 
the
 
system
 
in
 
Stay
 
mode
4
Disarm
 
the
 
system
5
Turn
 
on
 
the
 
auxiliary
 
output
6
Turn
 
off
 
the
 
auxiliary
 
output
7
Stop
 
the
 
system
 
status
 
report
8
Disconnect
 
(hang
 
up)
9
Repeat
 
command
 
menu
#
Bypass
 
all
 
open
 
sensors
 
and
 
arm
 
system Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
58
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Q46: Trouble Doesn’t
Sound at Night (0-
1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
UL
 
985:
 
Household
 
Fire
 
Warning
 
System
 
Units
 
installations,
 
this
 
setting
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
Con

trol
 
Panel
 
will
 
sound
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
caused
 
by
 
AC
 
loss,
 
system
 
low
 
battery,
 
sensor
 
low
 
battery
 
or
 
RF
 
supervision,
 
failure
 
to
 
communicate,
 
Control
 
Panel
 
tamper
 
while
 
disarmed,
 
and
 
cell
 
radio
 
faults.
To
 
prevent
 
annoying
 
the
 
subscriber,
 
the
 
system
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
suppress
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
from
 
sounding
 
from
 
10
 
PM
 
to
 
9
 
AM
.
 
The
 
trouble
 
alerts
 
are
 
still
 
displayed
 
and
 
immediately
 
reported
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station,
 
and
 
can
 
be
 
acknowledged,
 
but
 
they
 
won’t
 
sound
 
beeps
 
until
 
after
 
9
 
AM
.
If
 
the
 
trouble
 
condition(s)
 
self

clear
 
or
 
are
 
acknowledged
 
before
 
9
 
AM
,
 
no
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
sound
 
after
 
9
 
AM
 
(the
 
conditions
 
are
 
still
 
recorded
 
in
 
the
 
event
 
log).
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
suppresses
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
from
 
10
 
PM
 
to
 
9
 
AM
•To
 
allow
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
at
 
any
 
time,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q47: Trouble Resound After Hold Off (0-7)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
Fire
 
and
 
CO
 
sensors
 
are
 
required
 
to
 
re

sound
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
every
 
four
 
hours
 
until
 
the
 
trouble
 
is
 
resolved,
 
even
 
if
 
the
 
trouble
 
is
 
acknowledged
 
at
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
delay
 
re

sounding
 
these
 
types
 
of
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
for
 
1

7
 
days.
NOTE:
This
 
fe
ature
 
is
 
not
 
allowed
 
in
 
UL
 
985
 
installations.
 
The
 
setting
 
must
 
be
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
in
 
this
 
grade
 
of
 
installation.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
allows
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
for
 
CO
 
and
 
fire
 
sensors
 
to
 
re

sound
 
every
 
four
 
(4)
 
hours
 
after
 
being
 
acknowledged
•To
 
dela

y
 
re

sounding
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
for
 
CO
 
and
 
Fire
 
sensors,
 
select
 
(1

7)
 
days
Q48: Download CSID (6 Digits)
DEFAULT:
 
000000
The
 
system
 
supports
 
a
 
six
 
(6)

digit
 
CSID
 
code
 
that
 
is
 
used
 
for
 
remote
 
telephone
 
programming
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
This
 
code
 
is
 
verified
 
when
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
connects
 
with
 
the
 
downloading
 
software.
 
If
 
the
 
CSID
 
code
 
doesn’t
 
match
 
the
 
downloading
 
software,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
deny
 
the
 
connection.
•The
 
CS

ID
 
code
 
can
 
be
 
entered
 
manually
 
with
 
this
 
programming
 
question.
•If
 
th

is
 
field
 
is
 
left
 
with
 
the
 
default
 
(000000)
,
 
the
 
first
 
time
 
the
 
downloading
 
software
 
connects
 
with
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
the
 
field
 
will
 
be
 
filled
 
with
 
the
 
software’s
 
CSID.
Q49: Programming Mode Entry Reports
to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
A
 
report
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
any
 
time
 
installer
 
programming
 
mode
 
is
 
entered
 
and
 
exited.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
reporting
 
programming
 
mode
 
entry
 
and
 
exit.
•To
 
rep

ort
 
programming
 
mode
 
entry
 
and
 
exit,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
NOTE:
This
 
re
port
 
can
 
only
 
be
 
sent
 
through
 
the
 
telephone
 
dialer.
 
It
 
is
 
not
 
supported
 
through
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module.
Q50: Trouble Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Trouble
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
when
 
any
 
sensor
 
trouble
 
condition
 
occurs.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
reporting
 
sensor
 
trouble
 
conditions.
•To
 
not
 
re
port
 
sensor
 
trouble
 
conditions,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
This
 
set
ting
 
does
 
not
 
affect
 
trouble
 
reports
 
caused
 
by
 
Control
 
Panel
 
conditions,
 
only
 
trouble
 
reports
 
caused
 
by
 
sensors.
Q51: Manual Bypass Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Manual
 
bypass
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
when
 
any
 
sensor
 
has
 
been
 
manually
 
bypassed
 
by
 
the
 
user.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
sending
 
manual
 
bypass
 
reports.
•To
 
allo

w
 
sending
 
manual
 
bypass
 
reports,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q52: AC Loss Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
if
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
loses
 
AC
 
power.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
reports.
•To
 
tu

rn
 
off
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
reports,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
The
 
AC
 
pow
er
 
will
 
have
 
to
 
be
 
absent
 
from
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
for
 
the
 
time
 
set
 
by
 
programming
 
question
 
Q38
 
before
 
the
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
trouble
 
alert
 
 
is
 
displayed
 
(th
e
 
default
 
is
 
10
 
minutes).
 
If
 
programming
 
question
 
Q39
 
is
 
enabled,
 
the
 
actual
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
report
 
will
 
occur
 
at
 
a
 
random
 
time
 
of
 
up
 
to
 
four
 
hours
 
after
 
the
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
trouble
 
alert
 
 
is
 
displayed.
NOTE:
The
 
Con
trol
 
Panel’s
 
AC
 
power
 
icon
 
displays
 
the
 
power
 
status
 
immediately.
 
A
 
red
 
“X”
 
over
 
the
 
icon
 
indicates
 
no
 
AC
 
power.
Q53: System Low Battery Reports to CS
(0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Low
 
battery
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
if
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
battery
 
tests
 
low. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
59
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
•The
 
default
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
Control
 
Panel
 
low
 
battery
 
reports.
•To
 
turn
 
off
 
Con
trol
 
Panel
 
low
 
battery
 
reports,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q54: RF Low Battery Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Sensor
 
low
 
battery
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
if
 
a
 
sensor
 
battery
 
tests
 
low
 
and
 
sends
 
a
 
low
 
battery
 
transmission
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
and
 
allows
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
send
 
low
 
battery
 
reports
 
for
 
sensors.
 
•To
 
turn
 
this
 
fe
ature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q55: Opening Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Opening
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
each
 
time
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed.
 
The
 
user
 
or
 
key
 
fob
 
number
 
is
 
indicated
 
in
 
the
 
opening
 
report.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
opening
 
reports.
•To
 
allo

w
 
opening
 
reports,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q56: Closing Repo
rts to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Closing
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
each
 
time
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed.
 
The
 
user
 
or
 
key
 
fob
 
number
 
is
 
indicated
 
in
 
the
 
closing
 
report.
 
If
 
Quick
 
Arming
 
is
 
enabled,
 
User
 
#0
 
is
 
indicated
 
for
 
the
 
closing
 
report.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
closing
 
reports.
•To
 
allo

w
 
closing
 
reports,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q57: Alarm Restore Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Alarm
 
restore
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
after
 
an
 
alarm
 
when
 
either
 
the
 
bell
 
timeout
 
has
 
been
 
reached
 
or
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed.
 
If
 
alarm
 
restores
 
are
 
enabled
 
and
 
swinger
 
shutdown
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
two,
 
a
 
restore
 
will
 
be
 
reported
 
if
 
the
 
sensor
 
is
 
closed
 
(normal
 
st

ate)
 
at
 
bell
 
cutoff
 
or
 
becomes
 
closed
 
after
 
bell
 
cutoff.
 
If
 
swinger
 
shutdown
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
one,
 
a
 
restore
 
will
 
only
 
be
 
sent
 
if
 
the
 
sensor
 
is
 
closed
 
at
 
the
 
time
 
of
 
disarm.
 
Restores
 
are
 
not
 
sent
 
if
 
a
 
sensor
 
is
 
in
 
swinger
 
shutdown
 
until
 
the
 
time
 
of
 
disarm
 
and
 
the
 
se

nsor
 
is
 
closed.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
alarm
 
restore
 
reports.
•To
 
allo

w
 
alarm
 
restore
 
reports,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q58: Trouble Restore
Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Trouble
 
restore
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
when
 
any
 
sensor
 
trouble
 
condition
 
clears.
•The
 
def

ault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
send
 
reports
 
when
 
trouble
 
conditions
 
are
 
restored.
 
•To
 
turn
 
this
 
fe
ature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q59: Bypass Restore
Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Bypass
 
restore
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
when
 
any
 
sensor
 
that
 
was
 
force
 
bypassed
 
or
 
manually
 
bypassed
 
gets
 
restored.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
bypass
 
restore
 
reports.
•To
 
allo

w
 
bypass
 
restore
 
reports,
 
select
 
enabled
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q60: AC Restore Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
AC
 
power
 
restore
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
when
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
regains
 
AC
 
power
 
after
 
an
 
AC
 
power
 
loss.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
AC
 
power
 
restore
 
reports.
•To
 
tu

rn
 
off
 
AC
 
power
 
restore
 
reports,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
NOTE:
The
 
AC
 
po
wer
 
will
 
have
 
to
 
be
 
restored
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
for
 
one
 
minute
 
before
 
the
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
trouble
 
alert
 
 
automatically
 
clears.
 
If
 
programming
 
question
 
Q39
 
is
 
ena

bled,
 
the
 
actual
 
AC
 
power
 
restore
 
report
 
will
 
occur
 
at
 
a
 
random
 
time
 
of
 
up
 
to
 
four
 
hours
 
after
 
the
 
AC
 
power
 
loss
 
trouble
 
alert
 
 
has
 
cleared.
NOTE:
The
 
Con
trol
 
Panel’s
 
AC
 
power
 
icon
 
displays
 
the
 
power
 
status.
 
A
 
red
 
“X”
 
over
 
the
 
icon
 
indicates
 
no
 
AC
 
power.
Q61: System Low Battery Restore
Reports to CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
When
 
a
 
low
 
battery
 
condition
 
is
 
restored
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
the
 
system
 
can
 
send
 
a
 
restore
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
•The
 
def

ault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
send
 
reports
 
when
 
low
 
battery
 
conditions
 
are
 
restored.
•To
 
tu

rn
 
this
 
feature
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q62: RF Low Battery Restore Reports to
CS (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Sensor
 
low
 
battery
 
restore
 
reports
 
can
 
be
 
sent
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
if
 
a
 
sensor
 
battery
 
had
 
tested
 
low
 
and
 
is
 
now
 
OK.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
sensor
 
low
 
battery
 
restore
 
reports.
•To
 
tu

rn
 
off
 
sensor
 
low
 
battery
 
restore
 
reports,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q63: Phone Fail Detect (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
system
 
can
 
monitor
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
connected
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
If
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
is
 
shorted
 
or
 
cut,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
indicate
 
telephone
 
line
 
trouble
 
by
 
sounding
 
trouble
 
beeps
 
and
 
displaying
 
the
 
no

phone
 
icon. Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
60
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
If
 
the
 
optional
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
installed,
 
the
 
telephone
 
line
 
failure
 
will
 
still
 
be
 
reported
 
if
 
this
 
question
 
is
 
enabled.
•The
 
default
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
turns
 
this
 
feature
 
OFF.
•To
 
turn
 
on
 
thi
s
 
feature,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
NOTE:
If
 
(0)
 
Disable
d
 
is
 
selected
 
in
 
Q8:
 
Dialer
,
 
telephone
 
line
 
failure
 
detection
 
is
 
also
 
disabled
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
setting
 
specified
 
here
 
in
 
Q63:
 
Phone
 
Fail
 
Detect
.
Q64: Smart Test Reports
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Smart
 
test
 
reports
 
are
 
a
 
way
 
to
 
reduce
 
Central
 
Station
 
traffic.
 
If
 
smart
 
test
 
reports
 
are
 
enabled
 
and
 
regular
 
periodic
 
test
 
reports
 
are
 
enabled,
 
any
 
non

test
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
(alarm,
 
restore,
 
trouble,
 
etc.)
 
during
 
the
 
normal
 
operation
 
of
 
the
 
system
 
will
 
reset
 
the
 
periodic
 
test
 
report
 
timer

.
 
Periodic
 
test
 
reports
 
would
 
only
 
be
 
sent
 
if
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
has
 
not
 
reported
 
in
 
any
 
way
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
smart
 
test
 
reports.
•To
 
allo

w
 
smart
 
test
 
reports,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q65: RF Jam Caus
es Trouble (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
system
 
can
 
monitor
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
sensor
 
receiver
 
and
 
detect
 
whether
 
a
 
transmitter
 
is
 
stuck
 
on
 
the
 
air
 
causing
 
jamming.
 
When
 
jam
 
detect
 
is
 
enabled,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
indicate
 
a
 
trouble
 
condition
 
if
 
RF
 
jamming
 
is
 
detected.
NOTE:
This
 
pr
ogramming
 
question
 
only
 
functions
 
if
 
trouble
 
reports
 
are
 
enabled
 
with
 
programming
 
question
 
Q50.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
turns
 
RF
 
jam
 
detection
 
OFF.
 
•To
 
turn
 
on
 
RF
 
jam
 
de
tection,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q66: Daylight
Saving (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
adjust
 
its
 
displayed
 
clock
 
and
 
internal
 
clock
 
for
 
Daylight
 
Saving
 
Time
 
(DST).
 
If
 
the
 
cell
 
radio
 
is
 
used,
 
the
 
time
 
will
 
be
 
automatically
 
adjusted
 
regardless
 
of
 
this
 
setting.
 
The
 
system
 
default
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
use
 
the
 
current
 
start
 
(March)
 
and
 
end
 
(November)
 
dates
 
for
 
the
 
Un

ited
 
States.
 
The
 
DST
 
start
 
and
 
end
 
dates
 
can
 
be
 
adjusted
 
as
 
follows:
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
turns
 
ON
 
the
 
DST
 
clock
 
for
 
the
 
system.
•To
 
turn
 
of
f
 
the
 
DST
 
clock,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled.
NOTE:
If
 
ena
bled,
 
respond
 
to
 
programming
 
questions
 
Q67,
 
Q68,
 
Q69,
 
and
 
Q70
 
to
 
modify
 
the
 
start
 
and
 
stop
 
values
 
for
 
DST.
Q67: Daylight Saving
Start Month (01-12)
DEFAULT:
 
(03)
 
March
•The
 
de

fault
 
DST
 
start
 
month
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(03)
 
March
.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
start
 
month
 
for
 
your
 
country,
 
region,
 
or
 
state,
 
enter
 
the
 
desired
 
month,
 
(01

12)
 
January
 ‐ 
December
:
Q68: Daylight Saving Start Monday (1-7)
DEFAULT:
 
(2)
 
2nd
 
Sunday
•The
 
de

fault
 
(2)
 
sets
 
the
 
second
 
Sunday
 
as
 
the
 
daylight
 
saving
 
start
 
week.
•To
 
change
 
the
 
st
art
 
week,
 
enter
 
the
 
1st,
 
2nd,
 
3rd,
 
4th,
 
last,
 
second
 
from
 
last,
 
third
 
from
 
last
 
(1

7)
 
as
 
the
 
daylight
 
saving
 
start
 
week.
Q69: Daylight Saving End Month (01-12)
DEFAULT:
 
(11)
 
November
•The
 
de

fault
 
(11)
 
November
 
defines
 
the
 
daylight
 
saving
 
end
 
month.
•To
 
change
 
the
 
end
 
mon
th
 
for
 
your
 
country,
 
region,
 
or
 
state,
 
enter
 
the
 
desired
 
month,
 
(01

12)
 
January
 ‐ 
December
.
Q70: Daylight Saving End Sunday (1-7)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
1st
 
Sunday
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
1st
 
Sunday
 
defines
 
the
 
daylight
 
saving
 
end
 
week.
•To
 
change
 
the
 
end
 
wee
k,
 
enter
 
the
 
1st,
 
2nd,
 
3rd,
 
4th,
 
last,
 
second
 
from
 
last,
 
third
 
from
 
last
 
(1

7)
 
as
 
the
 
daylight
 
saving
 
end
 
week.
Q71: System Tamper
Causes Trouble (0-
1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
A
 
tamper
 
switch
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
detects
 
if
 
the
 
case
 
has
 
been
 
opened.
 
The
 
system
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
so
 
that
 
a
 
tamper
 
switch
 
activation
 
will
 
cause
 
a
 
trouble
 
indication
 
if
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed,
 
and
 
an
 
alarm
 
if
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed.
•The
 
de

fault
 
(1)
 
allows
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
tamper
 
switch
 
to
 
trigger
 
trouble
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed,
 
and
 
alarm
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed.
•To
 
ha

ve
 
the
 
system
 
ignore
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
tamper
 
switch,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled.
Q72: Quick Bypass (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
Normally,
 
sensors
 
that
 
are
 
violated
 
(open)
 
at
 
the
 
time
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
will
 
require
 
the
 
user
 
to
 
enter
 
their
 
code
 
to
 
force
 
bypass
 
them.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
be
 
programmed
 
so
 
that
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
with
 
open
 
sensors,
 
a
 
code
 
is
 
not
 
required
 
to
 
bypass
 
the
 
open
 
se

nsor(s)
 
and
 
complete
 
the
 
arming.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
requires
 
entering
 
a
 
code
 
to
 
bypass
 
sensors.
•To
 
allow
 
bypa
ssing
 
sensors
 
without
 
a
 
code,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q73: Disarming Keyfob After Alarm
(Alert) (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
system
 
can
 
produce
 
a
 
unique
 
sound
 
when
 
it’s
 
disarmed
 
with
 
a
 
key
 
fob
 
after
 
an
 
alarm
 
has
 
occurred.
 
Four
 
beeps
 
will
 
sound
 
from
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
speaker,
 
four
 
chirps
 
will
 
sound
 
from
 
the
 
external
 
sounder
 
(if
 
installed).
 
This
 
feature
  Control Panel Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
61
serves
 
as
 
a
 
safety
 
alert
 
to
 
the
 
user
 
so
 
they
 
can
 
enter
 
the
 
protected
 
premises
 
with
 
caution.
•The
 
default
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
will
 
not
 
cause
 
a
 
unique
 
sound
 
when
 
disarming
 
after
 
an
 
alarm.
•To
 
caus

e
 
unique
 
sound
 
when
 
disarming
 
after
 
an
 
alarm,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q74: Keyfob Arm/Disarm Confirmation
(0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
system
 
can
 
produce
 
a
 
unique
 
sound
 
when
 
it’s
 
armed
 
or
 
disarmed
 
with
 
a
 
key
 
fob.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
speaker
 
will
 
sound
 
one
 
beep
 
when
 
arming
 
and
 
two
 
beeps
 
when
 
disarming.
 
The
 
external
 
sounder
 
(if
 
installed)
 
will
 
sound
 
one
 
chirp
 
when
 
arming
 
and
 
two
 
chirps
 
when
 
disarming
 
(four
 
beeps
 
af

ter
 
an
 
alarm
 
if
 
Q73
 
is
 
enabled).
 
This
 
feature
 
indicates
 
to
 
the
 
user
 
that
 
their
 
key
 
fob
 
signal
 
was
 
received
 
by
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
in
 
case
 
other
 
arm/disarm
 
indications
 
(armed
 
LED,
 
etc.)
 
are
 
not
 
available
 
or
 
visible
 
to
 
the
 
user.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
will
 
not
 
cause
 
a
 
unique
 
sound
 
when
 
controlled
 
by
 
a
 
key
 
fob.
•To
 
caus

e
 
a
 
unique
 
sound
 
when
 
controlled
 
by
 
a
 
key
 
fob,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q75: Auto Un Bypass for Manual Bypass
(0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Violated
 
(open)
 
sensors
 
can
 
be
 
manually
 
bypassed
 
by
 
the
 
user
 
through
 
the
 
User
 
Toolbox
 
or
 
force
 
bypassed
 
at
 
the
 
time
 
of
 
arming.
Force
 
bypassed
 
sensors
 
automatically
 
have
 
their
 
bypasses
 
removed
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed.
Manually
 
bypassed
 
sensors
 
can
 
have
 
their
 
bypass
 
automatically
 
removed
 
at
 
disarming
 
or
 
have
 
their
 
bypasses
 
re
main
 
in
 
place.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
automatically
 
removes
 
bypasses
 
from
 
manually
 
bypassed
 
sensors
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed.
•To
 
ha

ve
 
manually
 
bypassed
 
sensors
 
remain
 
bypassed
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
disarmed,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q76: Force Bypass Reports (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
system
 
can
 
report
 
which
 
sensors
 
have
 
been
 
force
 
bypassed
 
by
 
the
 
user
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed.
 
Forced
 
bypassed
 
sensors
 
are
 
always
 
recorded
 
in
 
the
 
event
 
log,
 
regardless
 
of
 
the
 
setting
 
of
 
this
 
programming
 
question.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
prevents
 
reporting
 
forced
 
bypassed
 
sensors.
•To
 
rep

ort
 
forced
 
bypassed
 
sensors,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
Q77: Event Log (0-3)
DEFAULT:
 
(3)
 
All
 
Events
To
 
control
 
the
 
amount
 
of
 
event
 
log
 
entries,
 
the
 
events
 
that
 
get
 
recorded
 
into
 
the
 
system’s
 
event
 
log
 
can
 
be
 
selected
 
by
 
type.
 
This
 
setting
 
filters
 
the
 
events
 
that
 
populate
 
the
 
event
 
log.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(3)
 
All
 
Events
 
records
 
all
 
events
 
in
 
the
 
event
 
log.
•To
 
choose
 
dif
ferent
 
options,
 
select
 
one
 
of
 
these
 
filters:
Event
 
Log
 
Filters
(0)
 
Disabled
 
(no
 
events
 
logged)
(1)
 
All
 
Events
 
Except
 
Open,
 
Closing,
 
and
 
Bypass
(2)
 
All
 
Events
 
Except
 
Open
 
and
 
Closing
(3)
 
All
 
Ev

ents
Q78: Output
DEFAULT:
 
(11)
 
Follows
 
Internal
 
Sounder
 
Alarm
The
 
default
 
setting
 
for
 
ANSI/SIA
 
CP

01
 
is
 
(11)
 
Follows
 
Internal
 
Sounder
 
Alarm.
The
 
system’s
 
open
 
collector
 
output
 
is
 
available
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
terminal
 
block
 
to
 
connect
 
to
 
an
 
external
 
device.
 
The
 
conditions
 
that
 
will
 
cause
 
the
 
open
 
collector
 
output
 
to
 
activate
 
are
 
programmable.
• Select
 
one
 
of
 
the
 
set
tings
 
below:
Open
 
Collector
 
Output
 
Mode
(00)
 
Disabled
(01)
 
Activated
 
When
 
Armed
(02)
 
Activated
 
When
 
Disarmed
(03)
 
Activated
 
on
 
FTC
 
(Failure
 
to
 
Communicate)
(04)
 
Activated
 
on
 
Siren
 
Supervision
(05)
 
Activated
 
on
 
Radio
 
Fault
(06)
 
Activated
 
on
 
Burglary
 
Alarm
(07)
 
Activated
 
on
 
Fire
 
Alarm
(08)
 
Activated
 
on
 
Any
 
Alarm
(09)
 
Activated
 
on
 
Any
 
System
 
Trouble
(10)
 
Z

Wave
 
activation
 
(Option
 
#10
 
not
 
currently
 
active)
(11)
 
Follows
 
Internal
 
Sounder
 
Alarm
(12)
 
Follows
 
Exit/Entry
 
Beeps
Q79: Z-Wave Feature (0-3)
DEFAULT:
 
(3)
 
(3)
 
Enabled
 
on
 
Panel;
 
Rules
 
Disabled,
 
Remote
 
Access
 
Enabled
The
 
Z

Wave
 
home
 
services
 
feature
 
can
 
be
 
enabled
 
or
 
disabled
 
with
 
various
 
remote
 
control
 
access
 
options.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(3)
 
Enabled
 
on
 
Panel;
 
Rules
 
Disabled,
 
Remote
 
Access
 
Enabled
 
displays
 
the
 
Services
 
button,
 
but
 
will
 
show
 
a
 
message
 
that
 
the
 
feature
 
is
 
currently
 
disabled
 
and
 
the
 
user
 
should
 
call
 
the
 
installer.
•To
 
hide
 
the
 
Ser
vices
 
button,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
and
 
Hidden
.
•To
 
sh

ow
 
the
 
Services
 
button
 
but
 
disable
 
it
 
from
 
use,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Disabled
 
but
 
Visible
.
•To
 
sho

w
 
the
 
Services
 
button
 
and
 
disable
 
off
‐ 
site
 
remote
 
control,
 
select
 
(2)
 
Enabled
 
on
 
Panel,
 
Remote
 
Access
 
Disabled
.
Q80: Z-Wave Switches Feature (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Display
 
of
 
the
 
Home
 
Service’s
 
Switches
 
button
 
can
 
be
 
enabled
 
or
 
disabled.
NOTE:
This
 
pr
ogramming
 
question
 
only
 
functions
 
if
 
Q79:
 
Z

Wave
 
Feature
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(2)
 
or
 
(3). Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
62
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
•The
 
default
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
shows
 
the
 
Switches
 
button.
•To
 
hide
 
th
e
 
Switches
 
button,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q81: Z-Wave Thermost
ats Feature (0 to
1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Show
 
or
 
hide
 
the
 
Home
 
Service’s
 
Thermostats
 
button
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
NOTE:
This
 
pr
ogramming
 
question
 
only
 
functions
 
if
 
Q79:
 
Z

Wave
 
Feature
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(2)
 
or
 
(3)
.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
shows
 
the
 
Thermostats
 
button.
•To
 
hide
 
th
e
 
Thermostats
 
button,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q82: Z-Wave Door Locks Feature (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Display
 
of
 
the
 
Home
 
Service’s
 
Door
 
Locks
 
button
 
can
 
be
 
enabled
 
or
 
disabled.
 
This
 
programming
 
question
 
only
 
functions
 
if
 
the
 
Z

Wave
 
feature
 
enable
 
question
 
Q79:
 
Z

Wave
 
Feature
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(2)
 
or
 
(3).
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
shows
 
the
 
Door
 
Locks
 
button.
•To
 
hide
 
th
e
 
Door
 
Locks
 
button,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q83: Select Temperature Display Units
(0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Degrees
 
Fahrenheit
The
 
Home
 
Service’s
 
Z

Wave
 
thermostat
 
display
 
screens
 
can
 
show
 
the
 
temperature
 
in
 
degrees
 
Fahrenheit
 
or
 
degrees
 
Celsius.
NOTE:
This
 
pr
ogramming
 
question
 
only
 
functions
 
if
 
Q79:
 
Z

Wave
 
Feature
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(2)
 
or
 
(3)
 
and
 
Q81:
 
Z

Wave
 
Thermostats
 
Feature
 
is
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Enabled.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
(0)
 
Degrees
 
Fahrenheit
.
•To
 
ch

ange
 
the
 
setting,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Celsius
.
NOTE:
The
 
se
tting
 
you
 
select
 
here
 
also
 
changes
 
the
 
display
 
units
 
shown
 
on
 
the
 
weather
 
forecast
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
Home
 
screen.
Q84: Services Require Master Code (0 to
1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
Services
 
button
 
can
 
be
 
configured
 
to
 
require
 
the
 
use
 
of
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
to
 
access
 
Services.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
overrides
 
the
 
requirement
 
to
 
enter
 
a
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Services
 
menu.
•To
 
re

quire
 
the
 
use
 
of
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Services
 
menu,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled.
When
 
en

abled
 
then
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
is
 
required
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Services
 
and
 
the
 
Z

Wave
 
device
 
configurations.
 
This
 
keeps
 
unauthorized
 
users
 
from
 
being
 
able
 
to
 
change
 
Z

Wave
 
settings,
 
such
 
as
 
temperature,
 
lights
 
and
 
locks.
Q85: Master User Access to Z-Wave
Toolbox (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
The
 
Z

Wave
 
Toolbox
 
menu
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
require
 
the
 
use
 
of
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
or
 
the
 
installer
 
code.
 
By
 
default,
 
the
 
installer
 
code
 
is
 
required
 
for
 
users
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Z

Wave
 
Toolbox.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
requires
 
users
 
to
 
enter
 
the
 
installer
 
code
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Z

Wave
 
Toolbox
 
menu
 
and
 
all
 
of
 
its
 
features,
 
including
 
the
 
Advanced
 
Toolbox.
•To
 
re

quire
 
the
 
use
 
of
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
or
 
the
 
installer
 
code
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Z

Wave
 
Toolbox
 
menu,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
.
NOTE:
Whe

n
 
(1)
 
Enabled
,
 
the
 
Installer
 
code
 
will
 
still
 
be
 
required
 
to
 
access
 
the
 
Advanced
 
Toolbox
 
menu.
 
This
 
prevents
 
end
 
users
 
from
 
adding
 
or
 
removing
 
Z

Wave
 
devices.
Q86: Disable Siren After Two-Way Audio
(0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
This
 
setting
 
enhances
 
system
 
operation
 
in
 
personal
 
emergency
 
applications
 
and
 
also
 
provides
 
the
 
dealer
 
with
 
the
 
option
 
of
 
the
 
siren
 
sounding
 
until
 
the
 
bell
 
cut
 
off
 
or
 
to
 
the
 
end
 
of
 
a
 
two

way

voice
 
session.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
will
 
cause
 
the
 
siren
 
to
 
resume
 
after
 
two

way
 
audio
 
(if
 
the
 
bell
 
cut
 
off
 
timer
 
has
 
not
 
expired).

(1)
 
E

nabled
 
will
 
cause
 
the
 
siren
 
to
 
shut
 
off
 
after
 
a
 
two

way
 
audio
 
session.
Q87: Keyfob/Remote Arming Mode on
System Not Ready (0-2)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Auto
 
Bypass
 
with
 
Zone
 
Participation
 
on
 
Restore
This
 
setting
 
controls
 
how
 
the
 
system
 
will
 
react
 
when
 
there
 
are
 
open
 
sensors
 
and
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
remotely.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
will
 
automatically
 
bypass
 
all
 
sensors
 
that
 
are
 
open
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
remotely.
 
If
 
a
 
sensor
 
restores
 
while
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed,
 
the
 
sensor’s
 
bypass
 
will
 
be
 
removed,
 
and
 
the
 
sensor
 
will
 
be
 
ready
 
to
 
trigger
 
an
 
alarm.
•To
 
au

tomatically
 
bypass
 
all
 
sensors
 
that
 
are
 
open
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
is
 
armed
 
remotely,
 
and
 
keep
 
all
 
bypasses
 
in
 
place
 
during
 
the
 
arming
 
cycle,
 
even
 
if
 
a
 
sensor
 
restores,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Auto

Bypass
.
•To
 
prev

ent
 
arming
 
remotely
 
when
 
any
 
sensor
 
is
 
open,
 
select
 
(2)
 
Arm
 
Only
 
When
 
Ready
.
Q88: Siren Mode (0-1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Sound
 
for
 
Burglary
 
and
 
Fire/CO
 
This
 
setting
 
selects
 
which
 
alarm
 
types
 
will
 
activate
 
a
 
Z

Wave
 
siren
 
linked
 
to
 
the
 
system.
The
 
default
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Sound
 
for
 
Burglary
 
and
 
Fire/CO
 
causes
 
a
 
Z

Wave
 
siren
 
to
 
sound
 
during
 
burglary
 
and
 
Fire/CO
 
alarms.
•To
 
ha

ve
 
a
 
Z

Wave
 
siren
 
sound
 
only
 
during
 
burglary
 
alarms,
 
select
 
(1)
 
Sound
 
for
 
Burglary
 
Only
. Control Panel Programming
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
63
Q89: Allow Backligh
t Always On (Demo
Mode) (0-1)
NOTE:
May
 
cause
 
ghost/image
 
retention.
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disable
d
When
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
the
 
customer
 
can
 
program
 
the
 
“always
 
on”
 
option
 
for
 
backlight
 
programming.
 
Due
 
to
 
a
 
small
 
percentage
 
of
 
image
 
“ghosting”
 
on
 
the
 
panel
 
(because
 
the
 
backlight
 
never
 
goes
 
off),
 
this
 
question
 
was
 
been
 
created
 
but
 
has
 
been
 
defaulted
 
to
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q90: Energy Feature (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
 
and
 
Hidden
Select
 
(1)
 
Disabled
 
but
 
Visible
 
to
 
show
 
but
 
not
 
activate
 
the
 
energy
 
features.
 
You
 
can
 
also
 
select
 
(2)
 
Enabled
 
to
 
turn
 
the
 
energy
 
feature
 
ON.
 
Q91: Radio Modem Supplier
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
No
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
NOTE:
If
 
you
 
en
able
 
Q44:
 
Select
 
Lock
 
Installer
 
Programming
,
 
you
 
will
 
not
 
be
 
able
 
to
 
change
 
this
 
setting.
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
compliance
 
with
 
UL
 
1610,
 
Q91:
 
Select
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
(0
 
to
 
5)
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
1.
Select
 
the
 
option
 
tha
t
 
corresponds
 
to
 
the
 
appropriate
 
supplier.
 
Options
 
include:
Q92: Select Network Device (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
None
When
 
enabled,
 
the
 
(1)
 
Go!Bridge
 
option
 
provides
 
the
 
installer
 
with
 
the
 
following
 
questions
 
to
 
program
 
the
 
Go!Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
 
settings
 
into
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
Q: Network Device ID (read only)
Tap
 
Learn
.
 
Then
 
go
 
to
 
the
 
Go!Bridge
 
device
 
and
 
tap
 
the
 
Learn
 
button.
 
For
 
details,
 
see
 
the
 
Go!Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
 
Installation
 
Instructions
.
 
Q: Select Configuration Source
Default:
 
(0)
 
DHCP
Select
 
between
 
(1)
 
Static
 
or
 
(2)
 
DHCP
 
(Dynamic
 
Host
 
Configuration
 
Protocol).
 
The
 
default
 
setting
 
is
 
(0)
 
DHCP
 
and
 
is
 
the
 
most
 
common
 
selection.
 
The
 
other
 
option
 
is
 
(1)
 
Static
 
and
 
requires
 
entry
 
of
 
a
 
Device
 
IP
 
Address,
 
Gateway
 
IP
 
Address,
 
and
 
Subnet
 
Mask.
 
Q: Enter Device IP Address
Default:
 
000.000.000.00
0
NOTE:
This
 
que
stion
 
only
 
requires
 
an
 
answer
 
if
 
you
 
selected
 
(1)
 
Static
 
in
 
Q:
 
Select
 
Configuration
 
Source
.
Use
 
the
 
nu

meric
 
keypad
 
to
 
enter
 
the
 
IP
 
Address
 
for
 
the
 
Go!Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator.
Q: Enter the Gateway IP Address
Default:
 
000.000.000.0
00
NOTE:
This
 
que
stion
 
only
 
requires
 
an
 
answer
 
if
 
you
 
selected
 
(1)
 
Static
 
in
 
Q:
 
Select
 
Configuration
 
Source.
Use
 
the
 
nu

meric
 
keypad
 
to
 
enter
 
the
 
IP
 
Address
 
for
 
the
 
access
 
point
 
to
 
the
 
external
 
network.
 
Typically,
 
this
 
is
 
the
 
IP
 
Address
 
of
 
the
 
local
 
network
 
router.
Q: Enter the Subnet Mask
Default:
 
000.000.000.0
00
NOTE:
This
 
que
stion
 
only
 
requires
 
an
 
answer
 
if
 
you
 
selected
 
(1)
 
Static
 
in
 
Q:
 
Select
 
Configuration
 
Source.
Use
 
the
 
nu

meric
 
keypad
 
to
 
enter
 
the
 
IP
 
Address
 
for
 
the
 
subnet
 
mask
 
for
 
the
 
network.
Q: Select Port # (1 to 8)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Port
 
1
NOTE:
Ty

pically,
 
you
 
will
 
skip
 
this
 
question
 
unless
 
additional
 
programming
 
is
 
required.
Select
 
the
 
port
 
nu
mber
 
for
 
the
 
backend
 
server.
 
After
 
configuring
 
the
 
required
 
port,
 
tap
 
Next
 
on
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
•(1)
 
Po

rt
 
1
•(2)
 
Po

rt
 
2
•(3)
 
Po

rt
 
3
•(4)
 
Po

rt
 
4
•(5)
 
Po

rt
 
5
•(6)
 
Po

rt
 
6
•(7)
 
Po

rt
 
7

(8)
 
Po

rt
 
8
Q: Select Used (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Disabled
NOTE:
Ty

pically,
 
you
 
will
 
skip
 
this
 
question
 
unless
 
additional
 
programming
 
is
 
required.
It
 
is
 
re

commended
 
that
 
you
 
always
 
select
 
the
 
default
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
 
If
 
you
 
choose
 
(1)
 
Enabled
,
 
you
 
will
 
be
 
prompted
 
to
 
enter
 
the
 
port
 
value.
 
Q: Enter Port Value (0 to 65535)
DEFAULT:
 
(0)
 
Dis
abled
NOTE:
Ty

pically,
 
you
 
will
 
skip
 
this
 
question
 
unless
 
additional
 
programming
 
is
 
required.
It
 
is
 
re

commended
 
that
 
you
 
always
 
select
 
the
 
default
 
setting
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
 
If
 
you
 
select
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
in
 
Q:
 
Select
 
Used
 
(0
 
to
 
1)
,
 
use
 
the
 
numeric
 
keypad
 
to
 
enter
 
the
 
port
 
value.
 
NOTE:
The
 
port
 
value
 
is
 
the
 
port
 
nu
mber
 
for
 
Transmission
 
Control
 
Protocol
 
(TCP)
 
communication.
 
Port
 
numbers
 
can
 
range
 
from
 
0
 
to
 
65535.
 
Option
Supplier
(0)
 
No
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
This
 
is
 
the
 
default
 
setting.
(1)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
1Alarm.com
(2)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
2
Telular
(3)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
3
(4)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
4
(5)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
5
(6)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
6 Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
64
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Q: Enter Port Forward IP Address
DEFAULT:
 
000.000.000.00
0
Typically,
 
you
 
will
 
simply
 
accept
 
the
 
default
 
IP
 
Address
 
value
 
that
 
appears.
Q93: Enter Broadband Network Failure
Time (1-255)
DEFAULT:
 
30
 
Minutes
NOTE:
The
 
Go!B
ridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
to
 
use
 
this
 
function.
This
 
option
 
se
ts
 
the
 
amount
 
of
 
time
 
required
 
for
 
triggering
 
a
 
trouble
 
condition
 
if
 
the
 
system
 
detects
 
that
 
the
 
broadband
 
network
 
has
 
lost
 
its
 
connection.
 
After
 
the
 
connection
 
has
 
been
 
restored,
 
the
 
trouble
 
condition
 
clears.
•The
 
de

fault
 
failure
 
detection
 
setting
 
is
 
30
 
minutes.
•To
 
choose
 
a
 
d
ifferent
 
failure
 
detection
 
time,
 
enter
 
the
 
number
 
of
 
minutes
 
between
 
1

255
.
Q94: Select Broadband Network Failure
Causes Trouble (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
NOTE:
The
 
Go!B
ridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
to
 
use
 
this
 
function.
This
 
option
 
spec
ifies
 
whether
 
or
 
not
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
will
 
sound
 
and
 
display
 
a
 
trouble
 
alert
 
if
 
the
 
Go!Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
 
loses
 
its
 
broadband
 
connection.
 
The
 
trouble
 
alert
 
can
 
be
 
silenced
 
by
 
the
 
user
 
at
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
(broadband
 
trouble
 
is
 
logged
 
regardless
 
of
 
this
 
setting).
 
When
 
the
 
broadband
 
connection
 
is
 
re
stored,
 
the
 
trouble
 
indications
 
automatically
 
clear.
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
allows
 
Go!Bridge
 
network
 
failure
 
trouble
 
indications.
•To
 
turn
 
of
f
 
Go!Bridge
 
trouble
 
indications,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
Q95: Select Broadband Network Failure
Reports (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
NOTE:
The
 
Go!B
ridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
 
must
 
be
 
installed
 
to
 
use
 
this
 
function.
If
 
the
 
Go!

Bridge
 
IP
 
Communicator
 
loses
 
its
 
broadband
 
connection,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
can
 
report
 
the
 
fault.
 
•The
 
de

fault
 
setting
 
is
 
(1)
 
Enabled
 
which
 
turns
 
broadband
 
network
 
failure
 
reporting
 
ON.
 
•To
 
tu

rn
 
broadband
 
network
 
failure
 
reporting
 
OFF,
 
select
 
(0)
 
Disabled
.
 
Q96: Select Send Report 3 Times on
Panel Tamper (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
compliance
 
with
 
UL
 
1610,
 
this
 
question
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
disabled.
This
 
opt

ion
 
configures
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
transmit
 
three
 
(3)
 
reports
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
detects
 
that
 
the
 
panel’s
 
backplate
 
is
 
in
 
a
 
tamper
 
condition.
 

(1)
 
Enable
d
.
 
The
 
system
 
transmits
 
three
 
(3)
 
reports
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.

(0)
 
Dis

abled
.
 
The
 
system
 
only
 
transmits
 
a
 
single
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
 
Q97: Select Sound on Normal Closing
Acknowledgement (0 to 1)
DEFAULT:
 
(1)
 
Enabled
Configures
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
emit
 
a
 
sound
 
when
 
the
 
system
 
acknowledges
 
that
 
an
 
open
 
sensor
 
has
 
closed
 
(i.e.,
 
returned
 
to
 
its
 
normal
 
state).

(1)
 
Enable
d
.
 
The
 
system
 
emits
 
a
 
sound
 
on
 
sensor
 
closing.

(0)
 
Disable
d
.
 
No
 
sound
 
is
 
emitted
 
on
 
sensor
 
closing.
 
NOTE:
Fo

r
 
compliance
 
with
 
UL
 
1610,
 
this
 
question
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Enabled.
 
In
 
addition,
 
Q91
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Radio
 
Modem
 
Supplier
 
1
 
and
 
Q98
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(1)
 
Enabled
. Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
65
Final Installation Setup
Exiting Programming (System
Configuration)
After
 
programming
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
all
 
the
 
changes
 
need
 
to
 
be
 
saved
 
in
 
memory.
 
After
 
saving,
 
the
 
programmed
 
settings
 
will
 
remain
 
in
 
memory,
 
even
 
after
 
a
 
total
 
power
 
loss.
1
After
 
setting
 
all
 
the
 
required
 
programming
 
values
 
for
 
the
 
sensors
 
and
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
tap
 
End
.
2
Review
 
the
 
Summary
 
of
 
System
 
Configuration
 
screen
.
 
Use
 
the
 ↓ 
and
 ↑ 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
lis
Ɵ
ng.
 
Verify
 
that
 
each
 
option
 
is
 
set
 
correctly.
Figure 56
Summary of System Configuration Screen
3
To
 
save
 
the
 
programming
 
changes,
 
be
 
sure
 
the
 
Save
 
Changes
 
option
 
is
 
checked.
 
To
 
exit
 
without
 
saving
 
programming
 
changes
 
un

check
 
the
 
Save
 
Changes
 
option
 
(for
 
verification,
 
an
 
additional
 
confirmation
 
screen
 
appears).
 
Tap
 
Exit
.
4
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
takes
 
a
 
few
 
seconds
 
to
 
restart
 
and
 
display
 
the
 
Home
 
screen.
Customizing the Installation
After
 
programming
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
go
 
to
 
the
 
User
 
Toolbox
 
and
 
customize
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
suit
 
the
 
installation.
 
To
 
access
 
the
 
User
 
Toolbox,
 
do
 
the
 
following:
1
From
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Security
.
2
From
 
the
 
Security
 
screen,
 
tap,
 
Menu
.
3
From
 
the
 
Menu
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Toolbox
.
4
Enter
 
the
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
(the
 
default
 
master
 
user
 
code
 
is
 
1111).
5
Tap
 
User
 
Management
.
6
To
 
add,
 
change,
 
or
 
delete
 
a
 
user
 
code,
 
tap
 
a
 
User
 
#
 
button.
 
The
 
system
 
asks
 
to
 
confirm
 
the
 
code
 
entered.
 
Be
 
sure
 
to
 
set
 
a
 
Duress
 
Code
 
as
 
User
 
#8.
Figure 57
User Management Screen
NOTE:
User
 
codes
 
0000,
 
0001,
 
and
 
the
 
Installer
 
Code
 
are
 
not
 
permitted.
7
Setup
 
each
 
user
 
code
 
with
 
the
 
User
 
Access
 
Option
 
screen.
 
Each
 
User
 
Code
 
can
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
be
 
currently
 
valid
 
or
 
not,
 
or
 
to
 
have
 
conditional
 
validity.
 
Refer
 
to
 
the
 
User
 
Guide
 
for
 
details
 
on
 
setting
 
User
 
Code
 
Access
 
Schedules.
 
When
 
done,
 
tap
 
Back
.
8
At
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(1
 
of
 
3)
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Brightness/Volume
.
 
Then
 
set
 
the
 
brightness
 
level
 
for
 
the
 
display
 
screen
 
and
 
the
 
volume
 
for
 
the
 
chime
 
&
 
voice.
 
When
 
done,
 
tap
 
OK
.
Figure 58
Brightness/Volume Screen
9
At
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(1
 
of
 
3)
 
screen,
 
tap
 → 
to
 
go
 
to
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(2
 
of
 
3)
 
screen.
 
10
Tap
 
Backlight
 
Timeout
.
 
Then
 
tap
 
the
 
button
 
that
 
corresponds
 
to
 
the
 
number
 
of
 
seconds
 
or
 
minutes
 
the
 
backlight
 
turns
 
OFF
 
after
 
it
 
is
 
idle.
 
When
 
done,
 
tap
 
OK
.
Figure 59
Back Light Timeout Screen
NOTE:
If
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
properly
 
installed
 
and
 
registered,
 
the
 
system
 
automatically
 
sets
 
the
 
date
 
and
 
time
 
for
 
you.
 
Use
 
the
 
following
 
steps
 
only
 
if
 
you
 
want
 
to
 
change
 
the
 
date
 
and
 
time.
  Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
66
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
11
At
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(2
 
of
 
3)
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Set
 
Date
.
 
Then
 
use
 
the
 ↓ 
and
 ↑ 
arrows
 
to
 
set
 
the
 
month,
 
day,
 
and
 
year.
 
When
 
done,
 
tap
 
OK
.
 
Figure 60
Set Date Screen
12
At
 
the
 
Confirmation
 
screen,
 
tap
 
OK
.
 
13
At
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(2
 
of
 
3)
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Set
 
Time
.
 
Then
 
use
 
the
 ↓ 
and
 ↑ 
arrows
 
to
 
set
 
the
 
hours,
 
minutes,
 
and
 
AM/PM.
 
When
 
done,
 
tap
 
OK
.
 
Figure 61
Select Time Screen
14
At
 
the
 
Confirmation
 
screen,
 
tap
 
OK
.
 
•To
 
ret

urn
 
to
 
the
 
Security
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Back
.
OR
•To
 
ret

urn
 
to
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
press
 
. Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
67
Installer Testing
When
 
installation
 
and
 
programming
 
is
 
complete,
 
use
 
the
 
option
 
in
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
to
 
test
 
for
 
proper
 
system
 
operations.
Access the Installer Toolbox
To
 
access
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox:
1
At
 
the
 
Home
 
screen,
 
tap
 
the
 
system
 
logo
 
in
 
the
 
lower

right
 
corner.
2
At
 
the
 
Enter
 
a
 
Code
 
screen,
 
enter
 
the
 
installer
 
code
 
(the
 
default
 
installer
 
code
 
is
 
1561
).
The
 
Ins

taller
 
Toolbox(1
 
of
 
3)
 
screen
 
appears.
Disable/Enable Sounder
When
 
testing
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
both
 
the
 
internal
 
and
 
external
 
sounder
 
(if
 
installed)
 
will
 
be
 
activated.
 
To
 
limit
 
noise
 
during
 
the
 
testing
 
process,
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
offers
 
an
 
option
 
to
 
disable
 
the
 
sounder.
 
Disable the Sounder
To
 
disable
 
the
 
sounder:
1
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
(1
 
of
 
2)
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Disable
 
Sounder
.
2
At
 
the
 
Disable
 
Sounder?
 
screen,
 
tap
 
OK
.
NOTE:
The
 
in
ternal
 
sounder
 
emits
 
a
 
siren
 
for
 
two
 
(2)
 
seconds.
 
If
 
an
 
external
 
sounder
 
is
 
connected,
 
four
 
(4)
 
chirps
 
are
 
emitted.
 
3
At
 
the
 
Sounder
 
Disabled
 
screen,
 
tap
 
OK
.
 
NOTE:
The
 
sou
nder
 
will
 
be
 
automatically
 
re

enabled
 
in
 
30
 
minutes
 
or
 
you
 
can
 
manually
 
enable
 
it.
 
See
 
"Enable
 
the
 
Sounder"
 
on
 
pa
ge
 
67.
4
While
 
disabled,
 
the
 
Sounder
 
Disabled
 
icon
 
appears
 
in
 
the
 
status
 
bar.
Figure 62
Sounder Disabled Icon
Enable the Sounder
If
 
the
 
sounder
 
is
 
disabled,
 
you
 
can
 
manually
 
re

enable
 
it
 
as
 
follows:
1
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Enable
 
Sounder
.
 
2
At
 
the
 
Sounder
 
Enabled
 
screen,
 
tap
 
OK
.
Sensor Type (Zone) Report Test
To
 
verify
 
that
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
correctly
 
receives
 
reports
 
from
 
each
 
zone
 
(sensor
 
type):
1
Notify
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
.
 
Because
 
the
 
system
 
sends
 
test
 
signals,
 
notify
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
that
 
you
 
will
 
be
 
testing
 
the
 
system.
 
2
Fire
 
Test
.
 
Trigger
 
a
 
24

Hour
 
fire
 
sensor
 
(if
 
installed)
 
or
 
tap
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
Emergency
 
 
button
 
and
 
then
 
tap
 
the
 
Fi

re
 
button
 
(if
 
enabled).
 
Wait
 
for
 
approximately
 
45
 
seconds
 
for
 
the
 
report
 
to
 
complete,
 
then
 
disarm
 
the
 
console.
3
Panic
 
Test
.
 
Trigger
 
a
 
24

Hour
 
Panic
 
sensor
 
(if
 
installed)
 
or
 
tap
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel’s
 
Emergency
 
 
button
 
and
 
then
 
ta

p
 
the
 
Panic
 
button
 
(if
 
enabled).
 
Wait
 
about
 
45
 
seconds
 
for
 
the
 
report
 
to
 
complete,
 
then
 
disarm
 
the
 
console.
4
Emergency
 
Test
.
 
Trigger
 
a
 
24

Hour
 
emergency
 
sensor
 
(if
 
installed)
 
or
 
tap
 
the
 
Emergency
 
 
button
 
(if
 
enabled),
 
wait
 
ab

out
 
45
 
seconds
 
for
 
the
 
report
 
to
 
complete,
 
then
 
disarm
 
the
 
console.
5
Burglary
 
Test
.
 
Arm
 
the
 
system,
 
then
 
trigger
 
a
 
burglary
 
sensor,
 
wait
 
for
 
the
 
system
 
to
 
go
 
into
 
alarm
 
mode,
 
then
 
wait
 
about
 
45
 
seconds
 
for
 
the
 
report
 
to
 
complete,
 
and
 
then
 
disarm
 
the
 
console.
6
Verify
 
Tests
 
with
 
Central
 
Station
.
 
Check
 
with
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
that
 
each
 
zone
 
(sensor
 
type)
 
was
 
reported,
 
then
 
inform
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
that
 
the
 
testing
 
is
 
complete.
Walk Test
Radio
 
quality
 
can
 
vary
 
when
 
there
 
is
 
background
 
noise
 
on
 
the
 
operating
 
frequency.
 
Examples
 
of
 
background
 
noise
 
sources
 
include
 
telephones,
 
microwaves,
 
high

frequency
 
digital
 
products,
 
and
 
other
 
radio
 
communications.
To
 
determine
 
the
 
best
 
location
 
to
 
mount
 
each
 
sensor,
 
it
 
is
 
recommended
 
that
 
you
 
place
 
each
 
sensor
 
in
 
the
 
desired
 
mounting
 
location
 
and
 
then
 
pe

rform
 
a
 
Walk
 
Test.
 
This
 
helps
 
you
 
to
 
identify
 
whether
 
the
 
desired
 
location
 
has
 
good/weak
 
signal
 
strength.
 
When
 
you
 
find
 
a
 
location
 
with
 
good
 
signal
 
strength,
 
you
 
can
 
then
 
mount
 
the
 
sensor.
 
To
 
place
 
the
 
panel
 
into
 
Walk
 
Test
 
mode:
1
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
(1
 
of
 
2)
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Walk
 
Test
.
 
NOTE:
Wh

en
 
placing
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
into
 
Walk
 
Test
 
mode,
 
you
 
have
 
25
 
minutes
 
to
 
complete
 
the
 
test
 
before
 
the
 
screen
 
times
 
out.
 
The
 
system
 
also
 
sends
 
a
 
“Start
 
Test”
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station
 
and
 
beeps
 
once
 
every
 
30
 
seconds.
 
During
 
the
 
last
 
five
 
(5)
 
minutes
 
of
 
the
 
test,
 
the
 
system
 
bee

ps
 
two
 
(2)
 
times
 
every
 
30
 
seconds
 
and
 
the
 
 
icon
 
flashes
 
in
 
the
 
status
 
bar.
  Go!Control
 
Wireless
 
Security
 
System
  
|
  
Installation
 
and
 
Programming
 
Guide
68
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
2
When
 
the
 
System
 
Test:
 
Sensors
 
screen
 
appears,
 
you
 
can
 
tap
 
the
 ↓ 
and
 ↑ 
arrows
 
to
 
scroll
 
through
 
the
 
sensor
 
list.
Figure 63
System Test: Sensors Screen
3
Walk
 
to
 
the
 
first
 
sensor
 
in
 
the
 
list,
 
and
 
then
 
activate
 
that
 
sensor
 
to
 
test
 
it.
 
When
 
the
 
panel
 
receives
 
the
 
signal,
 
it
 
emits
 
(3)
 
beeps
 
and
 
then
 
GREEN
 
or
 
RED
 
bars
 
show
 
the
 
signal
 
strength.
 
The
 
greater
 
the
 
number
 
of
 
bars,
 
the
 
higher
 
the
 
strength.
 
If
 
the
 
signal
 
is
 
sufficient,
 
a
 
check
 
mark
 
appears.
 
If
 
insufficient,
 
an
 
“x”
 
appears.
 
Figure 64
System Test: Sensors Screen/Signal Strength
4
Repeat
 
the
 
test
 
for
 
each
 
sensor
 
in
 
the
 
list.
 
If
 
you
 
are
 
testing
 
a
 
sensor
 
with
 
multiple
 
loops,
 
(for
 
example,
 
a
 
Smoke/Heat/Freeze
 
alarm),
 
wait
 
15
 
seconds
 
between
 
each
 
loop’s
 
test.
NOTE:
If
 
a
 
sensor
 
is
 
not
 
detected,
 
no
 
signal
 
will
 
register.
 
Tap
 
OK
.
 
Then
 
at
 
the
 
Sensors
 
Test
 
Failed
 
screen,
 
tap
 
OK.
 
5
At
 
the
 
System
 
Test:
 
Console
 
screen,
 
tap
 
each
 
button
 
to
 
test
 
the
 
panel’s
 
LED
 
buttons
 
and
 
audio.
Figure 65
System Test: Console
6
When
 
the
 
console
 
tests
 
are
 
complete,
 
tap
 
OK
.
 
When
 
the
 
test
 
is
 
successfully
 
completed,
 
tap
 
OK
 
to
 
exit
 
Walk
 
Test
 
mode.
 
The
 
system
 
sends
 
a
 
“Stop
 
Test”
 
report
 
to
 
the
 
Central
 
Station.
Radio Status Test
If
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
installed
 
in
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
use
 
the
 
Radio
 
Status
 
screen
 
to
 
view
 
signal
 
strength,
 
serial
 
number,
 
registration
 
status,
 
and
 
other
 
information
 
for
 
the
 
cellular
 
connection.
 
The
 
is
 
a
 
helpful
 
tool
 
to
 
use
 
when
 
troubleshooting
 
the
 
installation.
Cell Phone Test
To
 
perform
 
a
 
cell
 
phone
 
test:
1
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Radio
 
Status
.
Figure 66
Installer Toolbox: Radio Status
2
At
 
the
 
Radio
 
Status
 
screen,
 
tap
 
Cell
 
Phone
 
Test
.
 
Figure 67
Radio Status Screen
The
 
Cell
 
Phone
 
Test
 
screen
 
appears
 
to
 
reveal
 
status
 
messages
 
and
 
test
 
results
Figure 68
Cell Phone Test Screen
3
When
 
the
 
results
 
appear,
 
tap
 
the
 ↓ 
and
 ↑ 
arrows
 
to
 
review
 
the
 
messages:
•RED
 
text
 
indicates
 
the
 
tested
 
signal
 
strength
 
is
 
zero,
 
too
 
low,
 
or
 
that
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
unregistered.
•ORANGE
 
text
 
indicates
 
the
 
connection
 
is
 
idle
 
and
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
registered.
• GREEN
 
text
 
indicates
 
good
 
signal
 
strength
 
and
 
that
 
the
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module
 
is
 
registered. Installer Testing
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
69
4
When
 
the
 
results
 
are
 
successful,
 
tap
 
OK
 
to
 
return
 
to
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(3
 
of
 
3)
 
screen.
Te le p h o n e Te st
Use
 
this
 
test
 
to
 
verify
 
the
 
land

line
 
connection
 
from
 
the
 
panel’s
 
built

in
 
digital
 
communicator
 
and
 
Central
 
Station.
 
1
At
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(3
 
of
 
3)
 
screen,
 
tap
 
the
 
Telephone
 
Test
 
button.
Figure 69
Toolbox (3 of 3) Screen
2
At
 
the
 
Enter
 
Master
 
Code
 
to
 
Access
 
Telephone
 
Test
 
screen,
 
enter
 
the
 
master
 
code.
The
 
Te

lephone
 
Test
 
screen
 
appears
 
to
 
reveal
 
status
 
messages
 
and
 
test
 
results.
 
3
Tap
 
the
 ↓ 
and
 ↑ 
arrows
 
to
 
review
 
the
 
results.
 
4
When
 
the
 
results
 
are
 
successful,
 
tap
 
OK
 
to
 
return
 
to
 
the
 
Toolbox
 
(3
 
of
 
3)
 
screen.
Restore Default System Configuration
You
 
can
 
restore
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
settings
 
back
 
to
 
its
 
factory
 
defaults.
 
There
 
are
 
two
 
(2)
 
types
 
of
 
reset
 
options:
 
Soft
 
and
 
hard
.
Soft Reset
A
 
soft

reset
 
lets
 
you
 
select
 
which
 
settings
 
to
 
restore
 
back
 
to
 
the
 
factory
 
defaults.
 
To
 
perform
 
a
 
soft

reset:
1
At
 
the
 
Installer
 
Toolbox
 
screen,
 
tap
 
the
 
Restore
 
Default
 
button.
The
 
Res

tore
 
Default
 
System
 
Configuration
 
screen
 
appears.
Figure 70
Restore Default System Configuration Screen
2
At
 
the
 
Restore
 
Default
 
System
 
Configuration
 
screen,
 
select
 
one
 
or
 
both
 
checkboxes:

Zones
.
 
Place
 
a
 
checkmark
 
in
 
this
 
box
 
to
 
replace
 
data
 
for
 
ALL
 
sensors
 
with
 
the
 
factory
 
default
 
values.
AND/OR

Console
.
 
Pl
ace
 
a
 
checkmark
 
in
 
this
 
box
 
to
 
replace
 
all
 
of
 
the
 
programming
 
answers
 
with
 
the
 
factory
 
defaults.
 
This
 
erases
 
the
 
user
 
codes,
 
resets
 
the
 
backlight
 
timeout
 
to
 
five
 
(5)
 
minutes,
 
and
 
resets
 
the
 
Brightness/Volume
 
settings.
 
IMPORTANT:
This
 
action
 
doe
s
 
not
 
restore
 
the
 
factory
 
default
 
settings
 
for
 
Z

Wave
 
questions
 
Q79

Q83
.
 
Hard Reset
A
 
hard

reset
 
restores
 
all
 
of
 
the
 
programming
 
settings
 
back
 
to
 
the
 
factory
 
defaults.
 
NOTE:
Be

fore
 
performing
 
a
 
hard
 
reset,
 
Q44:
 
Lock
 
Installer
 
Programming
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
option
 
(1)
 
or
 
(2)
 
and
 
Q45:
 
Lock
 
Default
 
Programming
 
must
 
be
 
set
 
to
 
(0).
 
See
 
"Q44:
 
Lock
 
Ins

taller
 
Programming
 
(0

2)"
 
on
 
page
 
57.
To
 
perf

orm
 
a
 
hard
 
reset:
1
Remove
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
cover
 
and
 
completely
 
disconnect
 
all
 
power
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
2
On
 
the
 
inside
 
back
 
of
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel,
 
plug
 
in
 
the
 
backup
 
battery.
 
3
Tap
 
and
 
hold
 
down
 
the
 
Emergency
 
and
 
Home
 
buttons.
 
4
Continue
 
to
 
hold
 
down
 
the
 
Emergency
 
 
and
 
Home
 
buttons
 
an

d
 
then
 
connect
 
DC
 
Power
 
to
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel.
 
5
Release
 
the
 
buttons
 
only
 
after
 
both
 
the
 
Emergency
 
 
and
 
Ho

me
 
buttons
 
are
 
lit
 
and
 
the
 
Control
 
Panel
 
screen
 
appears.
  70
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Regulatory Information
Wireless Product Notice
Radio
 
controls
 
provide
 
a
 
reliable
 
communications
 
link
 
and
 
fill
 
an
 
important
 
need
 
in
 
portable
 
wireless
 
signaling;
 
however,
 
there
 
are
 
some
 
limitations
 
which
 
must
 
be
 
observed.
•For
 
U.S.
 
installations
 
only:
 
The
 
radios
 
are
 
required
 
to
 
comply
 
with
 
FCC
 
Rules
 
and
 
Regulations
 
as
 
Part
 
15
 
devices.
 
As
 
such,
 
they
 
have
 
limited
 
transmitter
 
power
 
and
 
therefore
 
limited
 
range.
•A
 
receiver
 
cannot
 
respond
 
to
 
more
 
than
 
one
 
transmitted
 
signal
 
at
 
a
 
time
 
and
 
may
 
be
 
blocked
 
by
 
radio
 
signals
 
that
 
occur
 
on
 
or
 
near
 
their
 
operating
 
frequencies,
 
regardless
 
of
 
code
 
settings.
•Changes
 
or
 
modifications
 
to
 
the
 
device
 
may
 
void
 
FCC
 
compliance.
•Infrequently
 
used
 
radio
 
links
 
should
 
be
 
tested
 
regularly
 
to
 
protect
 
against
 
undetected
 
interference
 
or
 
fault.
•A
 
general
 
knowledge
 
of
 
radio
 
and
 
its
 
vagaries
 
should
 
be
 
gained
 
prior
 
to
 
acting
 
as
 
a
 
wholesale
 
distributor
 
or
 
dealer,
 
and
 
these
 
facts
 
should
 
be
 
communicated
 
to
 
the
 
end
 
users.
FCC Notice
This
 
equipment
 
generates
 
and
 
uses
 
radio
 
frequency
 
energy
 
and
 
if
 
not
 
installed
 
and
 
used
 
properly,
 
that
 
is,
 
in
 
strict
 
accordance
 
with
 
the
 
manufacturer’s
 
instructions,
 
may
 
cause
 
interference
 
to
 
radio
 
and
 
television
 
reception.
 
It
 
has
 
been
 
type
 
tested
 
and
 
found
 
to
 
comply
 
with
 
the
 
limits
 
for
 
a
 
Class
 
B
 
computing
 
device
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
Part
 
15
 
of
 
FCC
 
Rules,
 
which
 
are
 
designed
 
to
 
provide
 
reasonable
 
protection
 
against
 
such
 
interference
 
in
 
a
 
residential
 
installation.
 
However,
 
there
 
is
 
no
 
guarantee
 
that
 
interference
 
will
 
not
 
occur
 
in
 
a
 
particular
 
installation.
 
If
 
this
 
equipment
 
does
 
cause
 
interference
 
to
 
radio
 
or
 
television
 
reception,
 
which
 
can
 
be
 
determined
 
by
 
turning
 
the
 
equipment
 
off
 
and
 
on,
 
the
 
user
 
is
 
encouraged
 
to
 
try
 
to
 
correct
 
the
 
interference
 
by
 
one
 
or
 
more
 
of
 
the
 
following
 
measures:
•Relocate
 
the
 
Console
 
away
 
from
 
the
 
TV/radio
 
receiver.
•Plug
 
the
 
Console
 
into
 
a
 
different
 
wall
 
outlet
 
so
 
that
 
the
 
Console
 
is
 
on
 
a
 
different
 
branch
 
circuit.
•Re

orient
 
the
 
TV/radio
 
antenna.
•If
 
necessary,
 
the
 
user
 
should
 
consult
 
the
 
dealer
 
or
 
an
 
experienced
 
radio/television
 
technician
 
for
 
additional
 
suggestions.
FCC Telephone Rules and Regulations
The
 
FCC
 
requires
 
that
 
this
 
alarm
 
dialer
 
system
 
not
 
make
 
more
 
than
 
15
 
repetitive
 
dialing
 
attempts
 
to
 
a
 
single
 
telephone
 
number.
 
There
 
are
 
no
 
limitations
 
when
 
the
 
calls
 
are
 
made
 
sequentially
 
to
 
two
 
or
 
more
 
alternative
 
numbers,
 
or
 
when
 
these
 
calls
 
are
 
spaced
 
10
 
minutes
 
apart
 
to
 
a
 
single
 
number.
 
The
 
FCC
 
Rules
 
and
 
Regulations
 
do
 
not
 
specify
 
the
 
re

attempt
 
period
 
as
 
this
 
can
 
vary
 
for
 
specific
 
applications.
 
When
 
setting
 
this
 
period,
 
take
 
into
 
consideration
 
local,
 
interstate,
 
foreign
 
and
 
special
 
network
 
call
 
completion
 
characteristics,
 
network
 
processing
 
time,
 
a
 
sufficient
 
number
 
of
 
rings
 
and
 
busy/don’t
 
answer
 
modes.
Industry Canada Notices
NOTICE
:
 
The
 
Ringer
 
Equivalence
 
Number
 
(REN)
 
assigned
 
to
 
each
 
terminal
 
device
 
provides
 
an
 
indication
 
of
 
the
 
maximum
 
number
 
of
 
terminals
 
allowed
 
to
 
be
 
connected
 
to
 
a
 
telephone
 
interface.
 
The
 
termination
 
on
 
an
 
interface
 
may
 
consist
 
of
 
any
 
combination
 
of
 
devices
 
subject
 
only
 
to
 
the
 
requirement
 
that
 
the
 
sum
 
of
 
the
 
ringer
 
equivalence
 
numbers
 
of
 
all
 
the
 
devices
 
does
 
not
 
exceed
 
five
 
(5).
NOTICE
:
 
The
 
Industry
 
Canada
 
label
 
identifies
 
certified
 
equipment.
 
This
 
certification
 
means
 
that
 
the
 
equipment
 
meets
 
certain
 
telecommunications
 
network
 
protective,
 
operational
 
and
 
safety
 
requirements.
 
The
 
Department
 
does
 
not
 
guarantee
 
the
 
equipment
 
will
 
operate
 
to
 
the
 
user’s
 
satisfaction.
Before
 
installing
 
this
 
equipment,
 
users
 
should
 
ensure
 
that
 
it
 
is
 
permissible
 
to
 
be
 
connected
 
to
 
the
 
facilities
 
of
 
the
 
local
 
telecommunications
 
company.
 
The
 
equipment
 
must
 
also
 
be
 
installed
 
using
 
an
 
acceptable
 
method
 
of
 
connection.
 
The
 
customer
 
should
 
be
 
aware
 
that
 
compliance
 
with
 
the
 
above
 
conditions
 
may
 
not
 
prevent
 
degradation
 
of
 
service
 
in
 
some
 
situations.
Repairs
 
to
 
certified
 
equipment
 
should
 
be
 
made
 
by
 
an
 
authorized
 
Canadian
 
maintenance
 
facility
 
designated
 
by
 
the
 
supplier.
 
Any
 
repairs
 
or
 
alterations
 
made
 
by
 
the
 
user
 
to
 
this
 
equipment,
 
or
 
equipment
 
malfunctions,
 
may
 
give
 
the
 
telecommunications
 
company
 
cause
 
to
 
request
 
the
 
user
 
to
 
disconnect
 
the
 
equipment.
Users
 
should
 
ensure
 
for
 
their
 
own
 
protection
 
that
 
the
 
electrical
 
ground
 
connections
 
of
 
the
 
power
 
utility,
 
telephone
 
lines
 
and
 
internal
 
metallic
 
water
 
pipe
 
system,
 
if
 
present,
 
are
 
connected
 
together.
 
This
 
precaution
 
may
 
be
 
particularly
 
important
 
in
 
rural
 
areas.
CAUTION:
 
Users
 
should
 
not
 
attempt
 
to
 
make
 
such
 
connections
 
themselves,
 
but
 
should
 
contact
 
the
 
appropriate
 
electric
 
inspection
 
authority,
 
or
 
electrician,
 
as
 
appropriate. Regulatory Information
Copyright © 2016 Nortek Security & Control
71
Commercial Regulatory Listings
IMPORTANT:
When
 
used
 
with
 
the
 
Alarm.com
 
service,
 
this
 
security
 
system
 
has
 
been
 
evaluated
 
and
 
complies
 
with
 
UL
 
1610:
 
Central

Station
 
Burglar

Alarm
 
Units
.It
 
has
 
not
 
been
 
evaluated
 
for
 
UL
 
864:
 
Control
 
Units
 
and
 
Accessories
 
for
 
Fire
 
Alarm
 
Systems
 
and
 
UL
 
1076:
 
Proprietary
 
Burglar
 
Alarm
 
Units
 
and
 
Systems
.
 
For
 
commercial
 
installations
 
(UL
 
1610),
 
only
 
one
 
method
 
of
 
communication
 
is
 
to
 
be
 
used,
 
this
 
method
 
of
 
communication
 
is
 
a
 
GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module.
 
See
 
"GSM
 
(Cellular)
 
Radio
 
Module"
 
on
 
page
 
17.
 
IMPORTANT:
If
 
this
 
installation
 
is
 
a
 
commercial
 
installation,
 
please
 
inform
 
the
 
customer
 
(or
 
end
 
user)
 
that
 
commercial
 
Control
 
Panels
 
are
 
for
 
use
 
only
 
as
 
burglar
 
alarm
 
systems
 
and
 
not
 
for
 
fire
 
protection.
 
NOTE:
The
 
standard
 
backup
 
battery
 
that
 
is
 
included
 
with
 
all
 
2GIG
 
Control
 
Panels
 
does
 
not
 
support
 
UL
 
985
 
installations.
 
To
 
comply
 
with
 
the
 
secondary
 
supply
 
requirement
 
in
 
UL
 
985
 
Household
 
Fire
 
Warning
 
System
 
Units
,
 
you
 
must
 
install
 
the
 
2GIG
 
Console
 
Battery
 
Pack
 
(2GIG

BATT2X).
 
IMPORTANT:
All
 
conductors
 
and
 
attachments
 
are
 
manufactured
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
the
 
Standard
 
for
 
UL
 
681:
 
Installation
 
and
 
Classification
 
of
 
Burglar
 
and
 
Holdup
 
Alarm
 
Systems
.
 
The
 
Control
 
Panel
 
contains
 
hard
 
wiring
 
that
 
is
 
protected
 
and
 
not
 
exposed.
 
All
 
conductors
 
and
 
attachments
 
are
 
manufactured
 
in
 
accordance
 
with
 
the
 
UL
 
681:
 
Installation
 
and
 
Classification
 
of
 
Burglar
 
and
 
Holdup
 
Alarm
 
Systems
.
Stranded
 
conductors
 
clamped
 
under
 
wire

binding
 
screws
 
or
 
similar
 
parts
 
shall
 
have
 
the
 
individual
 
strands
 
soldered
 
together
 
or
 
arranged
 
in
 
a
 
construction
 
that
 
has
 
been
 
determined
 
to
 
be
 
the
 
equivalent.
IMPORTANT:
A
 
local
 
alarm
 
sounding
 
device,
 
alarm
 
housing,
 
and
 
control
 
unit
 
shall
 
comply
 
with
 
the
 
mercantile
 
requirements
 
in
 
UL
 
365:
 
Police
 
Station
 
Connected
 
Burglar
 
Alarm
 
Units
 
and
 
Systems
. 72
    
Copyright
 
©
  
2016
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
Limited Warranty
This
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
 
LLC
 
product
 
is
 
warranted
 
against
 
defects
 
in
 
material
 
and
 
workmanship
 
for
 
one
 
(1)
 
year.
 
This
 
warranty
 
extends
 
only
 
to
 
wholesale
 
customers
 
who
 
buy
 
direct
 
from
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
 
LLC
 
or
 
through
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
 
LLC’s
 
normal
 
distribution
 
channels.
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
 
LLC
 
does
 
not
 
wa

rrant
 
this
 
product
 
to
 
consumers.
 
Consumers
 
should
 
inquire
 
from
 
their
 
selling
 
dealer
 
as
 
to
 
the
 
nature
 
of
 
the
 
dealer’s
 
warranty,
 
if
 
any.
There
 
are
 
no
 
obligations
 
or
 
liabilities
 
on
 
the
 
part
 
of
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
 
LLC
 
for
 
consequential
 
damages
 
arising
 
out
 
of
 
or
 
in
 
connection
 
with
 
use
 
or
 
performance
 
of
 
this
 
pr

oduct
 
or
 
other
 
indirect
 
damages
 
with
 
respect
 
to
 
loss
 
of
 
property,
 
revenue,
 
or
 
profit,
 
or
 
cost
 
of
 
removal,
 
installation,
 
or
 
reinstallation.
 
All
 
implied
 
warranties
 
for
 
functionality,
 
are
 
valid
 
only
 
until
 
the
 
warranty
 
expires.
 
This
 
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
 
LLC
 
Warranty
 
is
 
in
 
lieu
 
of
 
all
 
other
 
warranties
 
expressed
 
or
 
implie
d.
All
 
products
 
returned
 
for
 
warranty
 
service
 
require
 
a
 
Return
 
Authorization
 
Number
 
(RA#).
 
Contact
 
Returns
 
at
 
1

855

546

3351
 
for
 
an
 
RA#
 
and
 
other
 
important
 
details.
2GIG
Nortek
 
Security
 
&
 
Control
 
LLC
1950
 
Cam

ino
 
Vida
 
Roble,
 
Suite
 
150
Carlsbad,
 
CA
 
9
2008

6517USA
For
 
t
echnical
 
support
 
in
 
the
 
USA
 
and
 
Canada
:
855

2GI

G

TECH
 
(855

244

4832)
Email:
 
2

gigtechsupport@nortek.com
Visit
 
www

.nortekcontrol.comor
 
dealer.2gig.com
 
for
 
technical
 
support
 
hours
 
of
 
operation
For
 
t
echnical
 
support
 
outside
 
of
 
the
 
USA
 
and
 
Canada
:
Contact
 
you

r
 
regional
 
distributor
Visit
 
2

gig.com/dealers/
 
for
 
a
 
list
 
of
 
distributors
 
in
 
your
 
region
77

000

063

001
 
Rev.
 
B
A
 
Nortek
 
Company


Uploaded